PR23566, false uninitialized warning
[binutils-gdb.git] / ld / ld.texi
1 \input texinfo
2 @setfilename ld.info
3 @c Copyright (C) 1991-2018 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
4 @syncodeindex ky cp
5 @c man begin INCLUDE
6 @include configdoc.texi
7 @c (configdoc.texi is generated by the Makefile)
8 @include bfdver.texi
9 @c man end
10
11 @c @smallbook
12
13 @macro gcctabopt{body}
14 @code{\body\}
15 @end macro
16
17 @c man begin NAME
18 @ifset man
19 @c Configure for the generation of man pages
20 @set UsesEnvVars
21 @set GENERIC
22 @set ARM
23 @set C6X
24 @set CSKY
25 @set H8300
26 @set HPPA
27 @set M68HC11
28 @set M68K
29 @set MIPS
30 @set MMIX
31 @set MSP430
32 @set NDS32
33 @set NIOSII
34 @set POWERPC
35 @set POWERPC64
36 @set Renesas
37 @set S/390
38 @set SPU
39 @set TICOFF
40 @set WIN32
41 @set XTENSA
42 @end ifset
43 @c man end
44
45 @ifnottex
46 @dircategory Software development
47 @direntry
48 * Ld: (ld). The GNU linker.
49 @end direntry
50 @end ifnottex
51
52 @copying
53 This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker LD
54 @ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
55 @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
56 @end ifset
57 version @value{VERSION}.
58
59 Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2018 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
60
61 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
62 under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
63 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
64 with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
65 Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
66 section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
67 @end copying
68 @iftex
69 @finalout
70 @setchapternewpage odd
71 @settitle The GNU linker
72 @titlepage
73 @title The GNU linker
74 @sp 1
75 @subtitle @code{ld}
76 @ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
77 @subtitle @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
78 @end ifset
79 @subtitle Version @value{VERSION}
80 @author Steve Chamberlain
81 @author Ian Lance Taylor
82 @page
83
84 @tex
85 {\parskip=0pt
86 \hfill Red Hat Inc\par
87 \hfill nickc\@credhat.com, doc\@redhat.com\par
88 \hfill {\it The GNU linker}\par
89 \hfill Edited by Jeffrey Osier (jeffrey\@cygnus.com)\par
90 }
91 \global\parindent=0pt % Steve likes it this way.
92 @end tex
93
94 @vskip 0pt plus 1filll
95 @c man begin COPYRIGHT
96 Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2018 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
97
98 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
99 under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
100 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
101 with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
102 Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
103 section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
104 @c man end
105
106 @end titlepage
107 @end iftex
108 @contents
109 @c FIXME: Talk about importance of *order* of args, cmds to linker!
110
111 @ifnottex
112 @node Top
113 @top LD
114 This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker ld
115 @ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
116 @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
117 @end ifset
118 version @value{VERSION}.
119
120 This document is distributed under the terms of the GNU Free
121 Documentation License version 1.3. A copy of the license is included
122 in the section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
123
124 @menu
125 * Overview:: Overview
126 * Invocation:: Invocation
127 * Scripts:: Linker Scripts
128 @ifset GENERIC
129 * Machine Dependent:: Machine Dependent Features
130 @end ifset
131 @ifclear GENERIC
132 @ifset H8300
133 * H8/300:: ld and the H8/300
134 @end ifset
135 @ifset Renesas
136 * Renesas:: ld and other Renesas micros
137 @end ifset
138 @ifset ARM
139 * ARM:: ld and the ARM family
140 @end ifset
141 @ifset M68HC11
142 * M68HC11/68HC12:: ld and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
143 @end ifset
144 @ifset HPPA
145 * HPPA ELF32:: ld and HPPA 32-bit ELF
146 @end ifset
147 @ifset M68K
148 * M68K:: ld and Motorola 68K family
149 @end ifset
150 @ifset MIPS
151 * MIPS:: ld and MIPS family
152 @end ifset
153 @ifset POWERPC
154 * PowerPC ELF32:: ld and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
155 @end ifset
156 @ifset POWERPC64
157 * PowerPC64 ELF64:: ld and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
158 @end ifset
159 @ifset S/390
160 * S/390 ELF:: ld and S/390 ELF Support
161 @end ifset
162 @ifset SPU
163 * SPU ELF:: ld and SPU ELF Support
164 @end ifset
165 @ifset TICOFF
166 * TI COFF:: ld and the TI COFF
167 @end ifset
168 @ifset WIN32
169 * Win32:: ld and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
170 @end ifset
171 @ifset XTENSA
172 * Xtensa:: ld and Xtensa Processors
173 @end ifset
174 @end ifclear
175 @ifclear SingleFormat
176 * BFD:: BFD
177 @end ifclear
178 @c Following blank line required for remaining bug in makeinfo conds/menus
179
180 * Reporting Bugs:: Reporting Bugs
181 * MRI:: MRI Compatible Script Files
182 * GNU Free Documentation License:: GNU Free Documentation License
183 * LD Index:: LD Index
184 @end menu
185 @end ifnottex
186
187 @node Overview
188 @chapter Overview
189
190 @cindex @sc{gnu} linker
191 @cindex what is this?
192
193 @ifset man
194 @c man begin SYNOPSIS
195 ld [@b{options}] @var{objfile} @dots{}
196 @c man end
197
198 @c man begin SEEALSO
199 ar(1), nm(1), objcopy(1), objdump(1), readelf(1) and
200 the Info entries for @file{binutils} and
201 @file{ld}.
202 @c man end
203 @end ifset
204
205 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
206
207 @command{ld} combines a number of object and archive files, relocates
208 their data and ties up symbol references. Usually the last step in
209 compiling a program is to run @command{ld}.
210
211 @command{ld} accepts Linker Command Language files written in
212 a superset of AT&T's Link Editor Command Language syntax,
213 to provide explicit and total control over the linking process.
214
215 @ifset man
216 @c For the man only
217 This man page does not describe the command language; see the
218 @command{ld} entry in @code{info} for full details on the command
219 language and on other aspects of the GNU linker.
220 @end ifset
221
222 @ifclear SingleFormat
223 This version of @command{ld} uses the general purpose BFD libraries
224 to operate on object files. This allows @command{ld} to read, combine, and
225 write object files in many different formats---for example, COFF or
226 @code{a.out}. Different formats may be linked together to produce any
227 available kind of object file. @xref{BFD}, for more information.
228 @end ifclear
229
230 Aside from its flexibility, the @sc{gnu} linker is more helpful than other
231 linkers in providing diagnostic information. Many linkers abandon
232 execution immediately upon encountering an error; whenever possible,
233 @command{ld} continues executing, allowing you to identify other errors
234 (or, in some cases, to get an output file in spite of the error).
235
236 @c man end
237
238 @node Invocation
239 @chapter Invocation
240
241 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
242
243 The @sc{gnu} linker @command{ld} is meant to cover a broad range of situations,
244 and to be as compatible as possible with other linkers. As a result,
245 you have many choices to control its behavior.
246
247 @c man end
248
249 @ifset UsesEnvVars
250 @menu
251 * Options:: Command-line Options
252 * Environment:: Environment Variables
253 @end menu
254
255 @node Options
256 @section Command-line Options
257 @end ifset
258
259 @cindex command line
260 @cindex options
261
262 @c man begin OPTIONS
263
264 The linker supports a plethora of command-line options, but in actual
265 practice few of them are used in any particular context.
266 @cindex standard Unix system
267 For instance, a frequent use of @command{ld} is to link standard Unix
268 object files on a standard, supported Unix system. On such a system, to
269 link a file @code{hello.o}:
270
271 @smallexample
272 ld -o @var{output} /lib/crt0.o hello.o -lc
273 @end smallexample
274
275 This tells @command{ld} to produce a file called @var{output} as the
276 result of linking the file @code{/lib/crt0.o} with @code{hello.o} and
277 the library @code{libc.a}, which will come from the standard search
278 directories. (See the discussion of the @samp{-l} option below.)
279
280 Some of the command-line options to @command{ld} may be specified at any
281 point in the command line. However, options which refer to files, such
282 as @samp{-l} or @samp{-T}, cause the file to be read at the point at
283 which the option appears in the command line, relative to the object
284 files and other file options. Repeating non-file options with a
285 different argument will either have no further effect, or override prior
286 occurrences (those further to the left on the command line) of that
287 option. Options which may be meaningfully specified more than once are
288 noted in the descriptions below.
289
290 @cindex object files
291 Non-option arguments are object files or archives which are to be linked
292 together. They may follow, precede, or be mixed in with command-line
293 options, except that an object file argument may not be placed between
294 an option and its argument.
295
296 Usually the linker is invoked with at least one object file, but you can
297 specify other forms of binary input files using @samp{-l}, @samp{-R},
298 and the script command language. If @emph{no} binary input files at all
299 are specified, the linker does not produce any output, and issues the
300 message @samp{No input files}.
301
302 If the linker cannot recognize the format of an object file, it will
303 assume that it is a linker script. A script specified in this way
304 augments the main linker script used for the link (either the default
305 linker script or the one specified by using @samp{-T}). This feature
306 permits the linker to link against a file which appears to be an object
307 or an archive, but actually merely defines some symbol values, or uses
308 @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} to load other objects. Specifying a
309 script in this way merely augments the main linker script, with the
310 extra commands placed after the main script; use the @samp{-T} option
311 to replace the default linker script entirely, but note the effect of
312 the @code{INSERT} command. @xref{Scripts}.
313
314 For options whose names are a single letter,
315 option arguments must either follow the option letter without intervening
316 whitespace, or be given as separate arguments immediately following the
317 option that requires them.
318
319 For options whose names are multiple letters, either one dash or two can
320 precede the option name; for example, @samp{-trace-symbol} and
321 @samp{--trace-symbol} are equivalent. Note---there is one exception to
322 this rule. Multiple letter options that start with a lower case 'o' can
323 only be preceded by two dashes. This is to reduce confusion with the
324 @samp{-o} option. So for example @samp{-omagic} sets the output file
325 name to @samp{magic} whereas @samp{--omagic} sets the NMAGIC flag on the
326 output.
327
328 Arguments to multiple-letter options must either be separated from the
329 option name by an equals sign, or be given as separate arguments
330 immediately following the option that requires them. For example,
331 @samp{--trace-symbol foo} and @samp{--trace-symbol=foo} are equivalent.
332 Unique abbreviations of the names of multiple-letter options are
333 accepted.
334
335 Note---if the linker is being invoked indirectly, via a compiler driver
336 (e.g. @samp{gcc}) then all the linker command-line options should be
337 prefixed by @samp{-Wl,} (or whatever is appropriate for the particular
338 compiler driver) like this:
339
340 @smallexample
341 gcc -Wl,--start-group foo.o bar.o -Wl,--end-group
342 @end smallexample
343
344 This is important, because otherwise the compiler driver program may
345 silently drop the linker options, resulting in a bad link. Confusion
346 may also arise when passing options that require values through a
347 driver, as the use of a space between option and argument acts as
348 a separator, and causes the driver to pass only the option to the linker
349 and the argument to the compiler. In this case, it is simplest to use
350 the joined forms of both single- and multiple-letter options, such as:
351
352 @smallexample
353 gcc foo.o bar.o -Wl,-eENTRY -Wl,-Map=a.map
354 @end smallexample
355
356 Here is a table of the generic command-line switches accepted by the GNU
357 linker:
358
359 @table @gcctabopt
360 @include at-file.texi
361
362 @kindex -a @var{keyword}
363 @item -a @var{keyword}
364 This option is supported for HP/UX compatibility. The @var{keyword}
365 argument must be one of the strings @samp{archive}, @samp{shared}, or
366 @samp{default}. @samp{-aarchive} is functionally equivalent to
367 @samp{-Bstatic}, and the other two keywords are functionally equivalent
368 to @samp{-Bdynamic}. This option may be used any number of times.
369
370 @kindex --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
371 @item --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
372 Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_AUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
373 @var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
374 specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_AUDIT}
375 will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. If the linker
376 finds an object with an audit entry while searching for shared libraries,
377 it will add a corresponding @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry in the output file.
378 This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit
379 interface.
380
381 @ifclear SingleFormat
382 @cindex binary input format
383 @kindex -b @var{format}
384 @kindex --format=@var{format}
385 @cindex input format
386 @cindex input format
387 @item -b @var{input-format}
388 @itemx --format=@var{input-format}
389 @command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
390 file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
391 @samp{-b} option to specify the binary format for input object files
392 that follow this option on the command line. Even when @command{ld} is
393 configured to support alternative object formats, you don't usually need
394 to specify this, as @command{ld} should be configured to expect as a
395 default input format the most usual format on each machine.
396 @var{input-format} is a text string, the name of a particular format
397 supported by the BFD libraries. (You can list the available binary
398 formats with @samp{objdump -i}.)
399 @xref{BFD}.
400
401 You may want to use this option if you are linking files with an unusual
402 binary format. You can also use @samp{-b} to switch formats explicitly (when
403 linking object files of different formats), by including
404 @samp{-b @var{input-format}} before each group of object files in a
405 particular format.
406
407 The default format is taken from the environment variable
408 @code{GNUTARGET}.
409 @ifset UsesEnvVars
410 @xref{Environment}.
411 @end ifset
412 You can also define the input format from a script, using the command
413 @code{TARGET};
414 @ifclear man
415 see @ref{Format Commands}.
416 @end ifclear
417 @end ifclear
418
419 @kindex -c @var{MRI-cmdfile}
420 @kindex --mri-script=@var{MRI-cmdfile}
421 @cindex compatibility, MRI
422 @item -c @var{MRI-commandfile}
423 @itemx --mri-script=@var{MRI-commandfile}
424 For compatibility with linkers produced by MRI, @command{ld} accepts script
425 files written in an alternate, restricted command language, described in
426 @ifclear man
427 @ref{MRI,,MRI Compatible Script Files}.
428 @end ifclear
429 @ifset man
430 the MRI Compatible Script Files section of GNU ld documentation.
431 @end ifset
432 Introduce MRI script files with
433 the option @samp{-c}; use the @samp{-T} option to run linker
434 scripts written in the general-purpose @command{ld} scripting language.
435 If @var{MRI-cmdfile} does not exist, @command{ld} looks for it in the directories
436 specified by any @samp{-L} options.
437
438 @cindex common allocation
439 @kindex -d
440 @kindex -dc
441 @kindex -dp
442 @item -d
443 @itemx -dc
444 @itemx -dp
445 These three options are equivalent; multiple forms are supported for
446 compatibility with other linkers. They assign space to common symbols
447 even if a relocatable output file is specified (with @samp{-r}). The
448 script command @code{FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
449 @xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
450
451 @kindex --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
452 @kindex -P @var{AUDITLIB}
453 @item --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
454 @itemx -P @var{AUDITLIB}
455 Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
456 @var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
457 specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_DEPAUDIT}
458 will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. This
459 option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit interface.
460 The -P option is provided for Solaris compatibility.
461
462 @cindex entry point, from command line
463 @kindex -e @var{entry}
464 @kindex --entry=@var{entry}
465 @item -e @var{entry}
466 @itemx --entry=@var{entry}
467 Use @var{entry} as the explicit symbol for beginning execution of your
468 program, rather than the default entry point. If there is no symbol
469 named @var{entry}, the linker will try to parse @var{entry} as a number,
470 and use that as the entry address (the number will be interpreted in
471 base 10; you may use a leading @samp{0x} for base 16, or a leading
472 @samp{0} for base 8). @xref{Entry Point}, for a discussion of defaults
473 and other ways of specifying the entry point.
474
475 @kindex --exclude-libs
476 @item --exclude-libs @var{lib},@var{lib},...
477 Specifies a list of archive libraries from which symbols should not be automatically
478 exported. The library names may be delimited by commas or colons. Specifying
479 @code{--exclude-libs ALL} excludes symbols in all archive libraries from
480 automatic export. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted
481 port of the linker and for ELF targeted ports. For i386 PE, symbols
482 explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported, regardless of this
483 option. For ELF targeted ports, symbols affected by this option will
484 be treated as hidden.
485
486 @kindex --exclude-modules-for-implib
487 @item --exclude-modules-for-implib @var{module},@var{module},...
488 Specifies a list of object files or archive members, from which symbols
489 should not be automatically exported, but which should be copied wholesale
490 into the import library being generated during the link. The module names
491 may be delimited by commas or colons, and must match exactly the filenames
492 used by @command{ld} to open the files; for archive members, this is simply
493 the member name, but for object files the name listed must include and
494 match precisely any path used to specify the input file on the linker's
495 command-line. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted port
496 of the linker. Symbols explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported,
497 regardless of this option.
498
499 @cindex dynamic symbol table
500 @kindex -E
501 @kindex --export-dynamic
502 @kindex --no-export-dynamic
503 @item -E
504 @itemx --export-dynamic
505 @itemx --no-export-dynamic
506 When creating a dynamically linked executable, using the @option{-E}
507 option or the @option{--export-dynamic} option causes the linker to add
508 all symbols to the dynamic symbol table. The dynamic symbol table is the
509 set of symbols which are visible from dynamic objects at run time.
510
511 If you do not use either of these options (or use the
512 @option{--no-export-dynamic} option to restore the default behavior), the
513 dynamic symbol table will normally contain only those symbols which are
514 referenced by some dynamic object mentioned in the link.
515
516 If you use @code{dlopen} to load a dynamic object which needs to refer
517 back to the symbols defined by the program, rather than some other
518 dynamic object, then you will probably need to use this option when
519 linking the program itself.
520
521 You can also use the dynamic list to control what symbols should
522 be added to the dynamic symbol table if the output format supports it.
523 See the description of @samp{--dynamic-list}.
524
525 Note that this option is specific to ELF targeted ports. PE targets
526 support a similar function to export all symbols from a DLL or EXE; see
527 the description of @samp{--export-all-symbols} below.
528
529 @ifclear SingleFormat
530 @cindex big-endian objects
531 @cindex endianness
532 @kindex -EB
533 @item -EB
534 Link big-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
535
536 @cindex little-endian objects
537 @kindex -EL
538 @item -EL
539 Link little-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
540 @end ifclear
541
542 @kindex -f @var{name}
543 @kindex --auxiliary=@var{name}
544 @item -f @var{name}
545 @itemx --auxiliary=@var{name}
546 When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_AUXILIARY field
547 to the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol
548 table of the shared object should be used as an auxiliary filter on the
549 symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
550
551 If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
552 run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_AUXILIARY field. If
553 the dynamic linker resolves any symbols from the filter object, it will
554 first check whether there is a definition in the shared object
555 @var{name}. If there is one, it will be used instead of the definition
556 in the filter object. The shared object @var{name} need not exist.
557 Thus the shared object @var{name} may be used to provide an alternative
558 implementation of certain functions, perhaps for debugging or for
559 machine specific performance.
560
561 This option may be specified more than once. The DT_AUXILIARY entries
562 will be created in the order in which they appear on the command line.
563
564 @kindex -F @var{name}
565 @kindex --filter=@var{name}
566 @item -F @var{name}
567 @itemx --filter=@var{name}
568 When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_FILTER field to
569 the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol table
570 of the shared object which is being created should be used as a filter
571 on the symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
572
573 If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
574 run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_FILTER field. The
575 dynamic linker will resolve symbols according to the symbol table of the
576 filter object as usual, but it will actually link to the definitions
577 found in the shared object @var{name}. Thus the filter object can be
578 used to select a subset of the symbols provided by the object
579 @var{name}.
580
581 Some older linkers used the @option{-F} option throughout a compilation
582 toolchain for specifying object-file format for both input and output
583 object files.
584 @ifclear SingleFormat
585 The @sc{gnu} linker uses other mechanisms for this purpose: the
586 @option{-b}, @option{--format}, @option{--oformat} options, the
587 @code{TARGET} command in linker scripts, and the @code{GNUTARGET}
588 environment variable.
589 @end ifclear
590 The @sc{gnu} linker will ignore the @option{-F} option when not
591 creating an ELF shared object.
592
593 @cindex finalization function
594 @kindex -fini=@var{name}
595 @item -fini=@var{name}
596 When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
597 executable or shared object is unloaded, by setting DT_FINI to the
598 address of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_fini} as
599 the function to call.
600
601 @kindex -g
602 @item -g
603 Ignored. Provided for compatibility with other tools.
604
605 @kindex -G @var{value}
606 @kindex --gpsize=@var{value}
607 @cindex object size
608 @item -G @var{value}
609 @itemx --gpsize=@var{value}
610 Set the maximum size of objects to be optimized using the GP register to
611 @var{size}. This is only meaningful for object file formats such as
612 MIPS ELF that support putting large and small objects into different
613 sections. This is ignored for other object file formats.
614
615 @cindex runtime library name
616 @kindex -h @var{name}
617 @kindex -soname=@var{name}
618 @item -h @var{name}
619 @itemx -soname=@var{name}
620 When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_SONAME field to
621 the specified name. When an executable is linked with a shared object
622 which has a DT_SONAME field, then when the executable is run the dynamic
623 linker will attempt to load the shared object specified by the DT_SONAME
624 field rather than the using the file name given to the linker.
625
626 @kindex -i
627 @cindex incremental link
628 @item -i
629 Perform an incremental link (same as option @samp{-r}).
630
631 @cindex initialization function
632 @kindex -init=@var{name}
633 @item -init=@var{name}
634 When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
635 executable or shared object is loaded, by setting DT_INIT to the address
636 of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_init} as the
637 function to call.
638
639 @cindex archive files, from cmd line
640 @kindex -l @var{namespec}
641 @kindex --library=@var{namespec}
642 @item -l @var{namespec}
643 @itemx --library=@var{namespec}
644 Add the archive or object file specified by @var{namespec} to the
645 list of files to link. This option may be used any number of times.
646 If @var{namespec} is of the form @file{:@var{filename}}, @command{ld}
647 will search the library path for a file called @var{filename}, otherwise it
648 will search the library path for a file called @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}.
649
650 On systems which support shared libraries, @command{ld} may also search for
651 files other than @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. Specifically, on ELF
652 and SunOS systems, @command{ld} will search a directory for a library
653 called @file{lib@var{namespec}.so} before searching for one called
654 @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. (By convention, a @code{.so} extension
655 indicates a shared library.) Note that this behavior does not apply
656 to @file{:@var{filename}}, which always specifies a file called
657 @var{filename}.
658
659 The linker will search an archive only once, at the location where it is
660 specified on the command line. If the archive defines a symbol which
661 was undefined in some object which appeared before the archive on the
662 command line, the linker will include the appropriate file(s) from the
663 archive. However, an undefined symbol in an object appearing later on
664 the command line will not cause the linker to search the archive again.
665
666 See the @option{-(} option for a way to force the linker to search
667 archives multiple times.
668
669 You may list the same archive multiple times on the command line.
670
671 @ifset GENERIC
672 This type of archive searching is standard for Unix linkers. However,
673 if you are using @command{ld} on AIX, note that it is different from the
674 behaviour of the AIX linker.
675 @end ifset
676
677 @cindex search directory, from cmd line
678 @kindex -L @var{dir}
679 @kindex --library-path=@var{dir}
680 @item -L @var{searchdir}
681 @itemx --library-path=@var{searchdir}
682 Add path @var{searchdir} to the list of paths that @command{ld} will search
683 for archive libraries and @command{ld} control scripts. You may use this
684 option any number of times. The directories are searched in the order
685 in which they are specified on the command line. Directories specified
686 on the command line are searched before the default directories. All
687 @option{-L} options apply to all @option{-l} options, regardless of the
688 order in which the options appear. @option{-L} options do not affect
689 how @command{ld} searches for a linker script unless @option{-T}
690 option is specified.
691
692 If @var{searchdir} begins with @code{=} or @code{$SYSROOT}, then this
693 prefix will be replaced by the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, controlled by the
694 @samp{--sysroot} option, or specified when the linker is configured.
695
696 @ifset UsesEnvVars
697 The default set of paths searched (without being specified with
698 @samp{-L}) depends on which emulation mode @command{ld} is using, and in
699 some cases also on how it was configured. @xref{Environment}.
700 @end ifset
701
702 The paths can also be specified in a link script with the
703 @code{SEARCH_DIR} command. Directories specified this way are searched
704 at the point in which the linker script appears in the command line.
705
706 @cindex emulation
707 @kindex -m @var{emulation}
708 @item -m @var{emulation}
709 Emulate the @var{emulation} linker. You can list the available
710 emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options.
711
712 If the @samp{-m} option is not used, the emulation is taken from the
713 @code{LDEMULATION} environment variable, if that is defined.
714
715 Otherwise, the default emulation depends upon how the linker was
716 configured.
717
718 @cindex link map
719 @kindex -M
720 @kindex --print-map
721 @item -M
722 @itemx --print-map
723 Print a link map to the standard output. A link map provides
724 information about the link, including the following:
725
726 @itemize @bullet
727 @item
728 Where object files are mapped into memory.
729 @item
730 How common symbols are allocated.
731 @item
732 All archive members included in the link, with a mention of the symbol
733 which caused the archive member to be brought in.
734 @item
735 The values assigned to symbols.
736
737 Note - symbols whose values are computed by an expression which
738 involves a reference to a previous value of the same symbol may not
739 have correct result displayed in the link map. This is because the
740 linker discards intermediate results and only retains the final value
741 of an expression. Under such circumstances the linker will display
742 the final value enclosed by square brackets. Thus for example a
743 linker script containing:
744
745 @smallexample
746 foo = 1
747 foo = foo * 4
748 foo = foo + 8
749 @end smallexample
750
751 will produce the following output in the link map if the @option{-M}
752 option is used:
753
754 @smallexample
755 0x00000001 foo = 0x1
756 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo * 0x4)
757 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo + 0x8)
758 @end smallexample
759
760 See @ref{Expressions} for more information about expressions in linker
761 scripts.
762 @end itemize
763
764 @kindex -n
765 @cindex read-only text
766 @cindex NMAGIC
767 @kindex --nmagic
768 @item -n
769 @itemx --nmagic
770 Turn off page alignment of sections, and disable linking against shared
771 libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
772 mark the output as @code{NMAGIC}.
773
774 @kindex -N
775 @kindex --omagic
776 @cindex read/write from cmd line
777 @cindex OMAGIC
778 @item -N
779 @itemx --omagic
780 Set the text and data sections to be readable and writable. Also, do
781 not page-align the data segment, and disable linking against shared
782 libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
783 mark the output as @code{OMAGIC}. Note: Although a writable text section
784 is allowed for PE-COFF targets, it does not conform to the format
785 specification published by Microsoft.
786
787 @kindex --no-omagic
788 @cindex OMAGIC
789 @item --no-omagic
790 This option negates most of the effects of the @option{-N} option. It
791 sets the text section to be read-only, and forces the data segment to
792 be page-aligned. Note - this option does not enable linking against
793 shared libraries. Use @option{-Bdynamic} for this.
794
795 @kindex -o @var{output}
796 @kindex --output=@var{output}
797 @cindex naming the output file
798 @item -o @var{output}
799 @itemx --output=@var{output}
800 Use @var{output} as the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; if this
801 option is not specified, the name @file{a.out} is used by default. The
802 script command @code{OUTPUT} can also specify the output file name.
803
804 @kindex -O @var{level}
805 @cindex generating optimized output
806 @item -O @var{level}
807 If @var{level} is a numeric values greater than zero @command{ld} optimizes
808 the output. This might take significantly longer and therefore probably
809 should only be enabled for the final binary. At the moment this
810 option only affects ELF shared library generation. Future releases of
811 the linker may make more use of this option. Also currently there is
812 no difference in the linker's behaviour for different non-zero values
813 of this option. Again this may change with future releases.
814
815 @kindex -plugin @var{name}
816 @item -plugin @var{name}
817 Involve a plugin in the linking process. The @var{name} parameter is
818 the absolute filename of the plugin. Usually this parameter is
819 automatically added by the complier, when using link time
820 optimization, but users can also add their own plugins if they so
821 wish.
822
823 Note that the location of the compiler originated plugins is different
824 from the place where the @command{ar}, @command{nm} and
825 @command{ranlib} programs search for their plugins. In order for
826 those commands to make use of a compiler based plugin it must first be
827 copied into the @file{$@{libdir@}/bfd-plugins} directory. All gcc
828 based linker plugins are backward compatible, so it is sufficient to
829 just copy in the newest one.
830
831 @kindex --push-state
832 @cindex push state governing input file handling
833 @item --push-state
834 The @option{--push-state} allows to preserve the current state of the
835 flags which govern the input file handling so that they can all be
836 restored with one corresponding @option{--pop-state} option.
837
838 The option which are covered are: @option{-Bdynamic}, @option{-Bstatic},
839 @option{-dn}, @option{-dy}, @option{-call_shared}, @option{-non_shared},
840 @option{-static}, @option{-N}, @option{-n}, @option{--whole-archive},
841 @option{--no-whole-archive}, @option{-r}, @option{-Ur},
842 @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}, @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries},
843 @option{--as-needed}, @option{--no-as-needed}, and @option{-a}.
844
845 One target for this option are specifications for @file{pkg-config}. When
846 used with the @option{--libs} option all possibly needed libraries are
847 listed and then possibly linked with all the time. It is better to return
848 something as follows:
849
850 @smallexample
851 -Wl,--push-state,--as-needed -libone -libtwo -Wl,--pop-state
852 @end smallexample
853
854 @kindex --pop-state
855 @cindex pop state governing input file handling
856 @item --pop-state
857 Undoes the effect of --push-state, restores the previous values of the
858 flags governing input file handling.
859
860 @kindex -q
861 @kindex --emit-relocs
862 @cindex retain relocations in final executable
863 @item -q
864 @itemx --emit-relocs
865 Leave relocation sections and contents in fully linked executables.
866 Post link analysis and optimization tools may need this information in
867 order to perform correct modifications of executables. This results
868 in larger executables.
869
870 This option is currently only supported on ELF platforms.
871
872 @kindex --force-dynamic
873 @cindex forcing the creation of dynamic sections
874 @item --force-dynamic
875 Force the output file to have dynamic sections. This option is specific
876 to VxWorks targets.
877
878 @cindex partial link
879 @cindex relocatable output
880 @kindex -r
881 @kindex --relocatable
882 @item -r
883 @itemx --relocatable
884 Generate relocatable output---i.e., generate an output file that can in
885 turn serve as input to @command{ld}. This is often called @dfn{partial
886 linking}. As a side effect, in environments that support standard Unix
887 magic numbers, this option also sets the output file's magic number to
888 @code{OMAGIC}.
889 @c ; see @option{-N}.
890 If this option is not specified, an absolute file is produced. When
891 linking C++ programs, this option @emph{will not} resolve references to
892 constructors; to do that, use @samp{-Ur}.
893
894 When an input file does not have the same format as the output file,
895 partial linking is only supported if that input file does not contain any
896 relocations. Different output formats can have further restrictions; for
897 example some @code{a.out}-based formats do not support partial linking
898 with input files in other formats at all.
899
900 This option does the same thing as @samp{-i}.
901
902 @kindex -R @var{file}
903 @kindex --just-symbols=@var{file}
904 @cindex symbol-only input
905 @item -R @var{filename}
906 @itemx --just-symbols=@var{filename}
907 Read symbol names and their addresses from @var{filename}, but do not
908 relocate it or include it in the output. This allows your output file
909 to refer symbolically to absolute locations of memory defined in other
910 programs. You may use this option more than once.
911
912 For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
913 followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
914 the @option{-rpath} option.
915
916 @kindex -s
917 @kindex --strip-all
918 @cindex strip all symbols
919 @item -s
920 @itemx --strip-all
921 Omit all symbol information from the output file.
922
923 @kindex -S
924 @kindex --strip-debug
925 @cindex strip debugger symbols
926 @item -S
927 @itemx --strip-debug
928 Omit debugger symbol information (but not all symbols) from the output file.
929
930 @kindex --strip-discarded
931 @kindex --no-strip-discarded
932 @item --strip-discarded
933 @itemx --no-strip-discarded
934 Omit (or do not omit) global symbols defined in discarded sections.
935 Enabled by default.
936
937 @kindex -t
938 @kindex --trace
939 @cindex input files, displaying
940 @item -t
941 @itemx --trace
942 Print the names of the input files as @command{ld} processes them.
943
944 @kindex -T @var{script}
945 @kindex --script=@var{script}
946 @cindex script files
947 @item -T @var{scriptfile}
948 @itemx --script=@var{scriptfile}
949 Use @var{scriptfile} as the linker script. This script replaces
950 @command{ld}'s default linker script (rather than adding to it), so
951 @var{commandfile} must specify everything necessary to describe the
952 output file. @xref{Scripts}. If @var{scriptfile} does not exist in
953 the current directory, @code{ld} looks for it in the directories
954 specified by any preceding @samp{-L} options. Multiple @samp{-T}
955 options accumulate.
956
957 @kindex -dT @var{script}
958 @kindex --default-script=@var{script}
959 @cindex script files
960 @item -dT @var{scriptfile}
961 @itemx --default-script=@var{scriptfile}
962 Use @var{scriptfile} as the default linker script. @xref{Scripts}.
963
964 This option is similar to the @option{--script} option except that
965 processing of the script is delayed until after the rest of the
966 command line has been processed. This allows options placed after the
967 @option{--default-script} option on the command line to affect the
968 behaviour of the linker script, which can be important when the linker
969 command line cannot be directly controlled by the user. (eg because
970 the command line is being constructed by another tool, such as
971 @samp{gcc}).
972
973 @kindex -u @var{symbol}
974 @kindex --undefined=@var{symbol}
975 @cindex undefined symbol
976 @item -u @var{symbol}
977 @itemx --undefined=@var{symbol}
978 Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
979 symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
980 modules from standard libraries. @samp{-u} may be repeated with
981 different option arguments to enter additional undefined symbols. This
982 option is equivalent to the @code{EXTERN} linker script command.
983
984 If this option is being used to force additional modules to be pulled
985 into the link, and if it is an error for the symbol to remain
986 undefined, then the option @option{--require-defined} should be used
987 instead.
988
989 @kindex --require-defined=@var{symbol}
990 @cindex symbols, require defined
991 @cindex defined symbol
992 @item --require-defined=@var{symbol}
993 Require that @var{symbol} is defined in the output file. This option
994 is the same as option @option{--undefined} except that if @var{symbol}
995 is not defined in the output file then the linker will issue an error
996 and exit. The same effect can be achieved in a linker script by using
997 @code{EXTERN}, @code{ASSERT} and @code{DEFINED} together. This option
998 can be used multiple times to require additional symbols.
999
1000 @kindex -Ur
1001 @cindex constructors
1002 @item -Ur
1003 For anything other than C++ programs, this option is equivalent to
1004 @samp{-r}: it generates relocatable output---i.e., an output file that can in
1005 turn serve as input to @command{ld}. When linking C++ programs, @samp{-Ur}
1006 @emph{does} resolve references to constructors, unlike @samp{-r}.
1007 It does not work to use @samp{-Ur} on files that were themselves linked
1008 with @samp{-Ur}; once the constructor table has been built, it cannot
1009 be added to. Use @samp{-Ur} only for the last partial link, and
1010 @samp{-r} for the others.
1011
1012 @kindex --orphan-handling=@var{MODE}
1013 @cindex orphan sections
1014 @cindex sections, orphan
1015 @item --orphan-handling=@var{MODE}
1016 Control how orphan sections are handled. An orphan section is one not
1017 specifically mentioned in a linker script. @xref{Orphan Sections}.
1018
1019 @var{MODE} can have any of the following values:
1020
1021 @table @code
1022 @item place
1023 Orphan sections are placed into a suitable output section following
1024 the strategy described in @ref{Orphan Sections}. The option
1025 @samp{--unique} also affects how sections are placed.
1026
1027 @item discard
1028 All orphan sections are discarded, by placing them in the
1029 @samp{/DISCARD/} section (@pxref{Output Section Discarding}).
1030
1031 @item warn
1032 The linker will place the orphan section as for @code{place} and also
1033 issue a warning.
1034
1035 @item error
1036 The linker will exit with an error if any orphan section is found.
1037 @end table
1038
1039 The default if @samp{--orphan-handling} is not given is @code{place}.
1040
1041 @kindex --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
1042 @item --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
1043 Creates a separate output section for every input section matching
1044 @var{SECTION}, or if the optional wildcard @var{SECTION} argument is
1045 missing, for every orphan input section. An orphan section is one not
1046 specifically mentioned in a linker script. You may use this option
1047 multiple times on the command line; It prevents the normal merging of
1048 input sections with the same name, overriding output section assignments
1049 in a linker script.
1050
1051 @kindex -v
1052 @kindex -V
1053 @kindex --version
1054 @cindex version
1055 @item -v
1056 @itemx --version
1057 @itemx -V
1058 Display the version number for @command{ld}. The @option{-V} option also
1059 lists the supported emulations.
1060
1061 @kindex -x
1062 @kindex --discard-all
1063 @cindex deleting local symbols
1064 @item -x
1065 @itemx --discard-all
1066 Delete all local symbols.
1067
1068 @kindex -X
1069 @kindex --discard-locals
1070 @cindex local symbols, deleting
1071 @item -X
1072 @itemx --discard-locals
1073 Delete all temporary local symbols. (These symbols start with
1074 system-specific local label prefixes, typically @samp{.L} for ELF systems
1075 or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems.)
1076
1077 @kindex -y @var{symbol}
1078 @kindex --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
1079 @cindex symbol tracing
1080 @item -y @var{symbol}
1081 @itemx --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
1082 Print the name of each linked file in which @var{symbol} appears. This
1083 option may be given any number of times. On many systems it is necessary
1084 to prepend an underscore.
1085
1086 This option is useful when you have an undefined symbol in your link but
1087 don't know where the reference is coming from.
1088
1089 @kindex -Y @var{path}
1090 @item -Y @var{path}
1091 Add @var{path} to the default library search path. This option exists
1092 for Solaris compatibility.
1093
1094 @kindex -z @var{keyword}
1095 @item -z @var{keyword}
1096 The recognized keywords are:
1097 @table @samp
1098
1099 @item bndplt
1100 Always generate BND prefix in PLT entries. Supported for Linux/x86_64.
1101
1102 @item call-nop=prefix-addr
1103 @itemx call-nop=suffix-nop
1104 @itemx call-nop=prefix-@var{byte}
1105 @itemx call-nop=suffix-@var{byte}
1106 Specify the 1-byte @code{NOP} padding when transforming indirect call
1107 to a locally defined function, foo, via its GOT slot.
1108 @option{call-nop=prefix-addr} generates @code{0x67 call foo}.
1109 @option{call-nop=suffix-nop} generates @code{call foo 0x90}.
1110 @option{call-nop=prefix-@var{byte}} generates @code{@var{byte} call foo}.
1111 @option{call-nop=suffix-@var{byte}} generates @code{call foo @var{byte}}.
1112 Supported for i386 and x86_64.
1113
1114 @item combreloc
1115 @itemx nocombreloc
1116 Combine multiple dynamic relocation sections and sort to improve
1117 dynamic symbol lookup caching. Do not do this if @samp{nocombreloc}.
1118
1119 @item common
1120 @itemx nocommon
1121 Generate common symbols with STT_COMMON type during a relocatable
1122 link. Use STT_OBJECT type if @samp{nocommon}.
1123
1124 @item common-page-size=@var{value}
1125 Set the page size most commonly used to @var{value}. Memory image
1126 layout will be optimized to minimize memory pages if the system is
1127 using pages of this size.
1128
1129 @item defs
1130 Report unresolved symbol references from regular object files. This
1131 is done even if the linker is creating a non-symbolic shared library.
1132 This option is the inverse of @samp{-z undefs}.
1133
1134 @item dynamic-undefined-weak
1135 @itemx nodynamic-undefined-weak
1136 Make undefined weak symbols dynamic when building a dynamic object,
1137 if they are referenced from a regular object file and not forced local
1138 by symbol visibility or versioning. Do not make them dynamic if
1139 @samp{nodynamic-undefined-weak}. If neither option is given, a target
1140 may default to either option being in force, or make some other
1141 selection of undefined weak symbols dynamic. Not all targets support
1142 these options.
1143
1144 @item execstack
1145 Marks the object as requiring executable stack.
1146
1147 @item global
1148 This option is only meaningful when building a shared object. It makes
1149 the symbols defined by this shared object available for symbol resolution
1150 of subsequently loaded libraries.
1151
1152 @item globalaudit
1153 This option is only meaningful when building a dynamic executable.
1154 This option marks the executable as requiring global auditing by
1155 setting the @code{DF_1_GLOBAUDIT} bit in the @code{DT_FLAGS_1} dynamic
1156 tag. Global auditing requires that any auditing library defined via
1157 the @option{--depaudit} or @option{-P} command-line options be run for
1158 all dynamic objects loaded by the application.
1159
1160 @item ibtplt
1161 Generate Intel Indirect Branch Tracking (IBT) enabled PLT entries.
1162 Supported for Linux/i386 and Linux/x86_64.
1163
1164 @item ibt
1165 Generate GNU_PROPERTY_X86_FEATURE_1_IBT in .note.gnu.property section
1166 to indicate compatibility with IBT. This also implies @option{ibtplt}.
1167 Supported for Linux/i386 and Linux/x86_64.
1168
1169 @item initfirst
1170 This option is only meaningful when building a shared object.
1171 It marks the object so that its runtime initialization will occur
1172 before the runtime initialization of any other objects brought into
1173 the process at the same time. Similarly the runtime finalization of
1174 the object will occur after the runtime finalization of any other
1175 objects.
1176
1177 @item interpose
1178 Specify that the dynamic loader should modify its symbol search order
1179 so that symbols in this shared library interpose all other shared
1180 libraries not so marked.
1181
1182 @item lazy
1183 When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1184 dynamic linker to defer function call resolution to the point when
1185 the function is called (lazy binding), rather than at load time.
1186 Lazy binding is the default.
1187
1188 @item loadfltr
1189 Specify that the object's filters be processed immediately at runtime.
1190
1191 @item max-page-size=@var{value}
1192 Set the maximum memory page size supported to @var{value}.
1193
1194 @item muldefs
1195 Allow multiple definitions.
1196
1197 @item nocopyreloc
1198 Disable linker generated .dynbss variables used in place of variables
1199 defined in shared libraries. May result in dynamic text relocations.
1200
1201 @item nodefaultlib
1202 Specify that the dynamic loader search for dependencies of this object
1203 should ignore any default library search paths.
1204
1205 @item nodelete
1206 Specify that the object shouldn't be unloaded at runtime.
1207
1208 @item nodlopen
1209 Specify that the object is not available to @code{dlopen}.
1210
1211 @item nodump
1212 Specify that the object can not be dumped by @code{dldump}.
1213
1214 @item noexecstack
1215 Marks the object as not requiring executable stack.
1216
1217 @item noextern-protected-data
1218 Don't treat protected data symbols as external when building a shared
1219 library. This option overrides the linker backend default. It can be
1220 used to work around incorrect relocations against protected data symbols
1221 generated by compiler. Updates on protected data symbols by another
1222 module aren't visible to the resulting shared library. Supported for
1223 i386 and x86-64.
1224
1225 @item noreloc-overflow
1226 Disable relocation overflow check. This can be used to disable
1227 relocation overflow check if there will be no dynamic relocation
1228 overflow at run-time. Supported for x86_64.
1229
1230 @item now
1231 When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1232 dynamic linker to resolve all symbols when the program is started, or
1233 when the shared library is loaded by dlopen, instead of deferring
1234 function call resolution to the point when the function is first
1235 called.
1236
1237 @item origin
1238 Specify that the object requires @samp{$ORIGIN} handling in paths.
1239
1240 @item relro
1241 @itemx norelro
1242 Create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object. This
1243 specifies a memory segment that should be made read-only after
1244 relocation, if supported. Specifying @samp{common-page-size} smaller
1245 than the system page size will render this protection ineffective.
1246 Don't create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment if @samp{norelro}.
1247
1248 @item separate-code
1249 @itemx noseparate-code
1250 Create separate code @code{PT_LOAD} segment header in the object. This
1251 specifies a memory segment that should contain only instructions and must
1252 be in wholly disjoint pages from any other data. Don't create separate
1253 code @code{PT_LOAD} segment if @samp{noseparate-code} is used.
1254
1255 @item shstk
1256 Generate GNU_PROPERTY_X86_FEATURE_1_SHSTK in .note.gnu.property section
1257 to indicate compatibility with Intel Shadow Stack. Supported for
1258 Linux/i386 and Linux/x86_64.
1259
1260 @item stack-size=@var{value}
1261 Specify a stack size for an ELF @code{PT_GNU_STACK} segment.
1262 Specifying zero will override any default non-zero sized
1263 @code{PT_GNU_STACK} segment creation.
1264
1265 @item text
1266 @itemx notext
1267 @itemx textoff
1268 Report an error if DT_TEXTREL is set, i.e., if the binary has dynamic
1269 relocations in read-only sections. Don't report an error if
1270 @samp{notext} or @samp{textoff}.
1271
1272 @item undefs
1273 Do not report unresolved symbol references from regular object files,
1274 either when creating an executable, or when creating a shared library.
1275 This option is the inverse of @samp{-z defs}.
1276
1277 @end table
1278
1279 Other keywords are ignored for Solaris compatibility.
1280
1281 @kindex -(
1282 @cindex groups of archives
1283 @item -( @var{archives} -)
1284 @itemx --start-group @var{archives} --end-group
1285 The @var{archives} should be a list of archive files. They may be
1286 either explicit file names, or @samp{-l} options.
1287
1288 The specified archives are searched repeatedly until no new undefined
1289 references are created. Normally, an archive is searched only once in
1290 the order that it is specified on the command line. If a symbol in that
1291 archive is needed to resolve an undefined symbol referred to by an
1292 object in an archive that appears later on the command line, the linker
1293 would not be able to resolve that reference. By grouping the archives,
1294 they all be searched repeatedly until all possible references are
1295 resolved.
1296
1297 Using this option has a significant performance cost. It is best to use
1298 it only when there are unavoidable circular references between two or
1299 more archives.
1300
1301 @kindex --accept-unknown-input-arch
1302 @kindex --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1303 @item --accept-unknown-input-arch
1304 @itemx --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1305 Tells the linker to accept input files whose architecture cannot be
1306 recognised. The assumption is that the user knows what they are doing
1307 and deliberately wants to link in these unknown input files. This was
1308 the default behaviour of the linker, before release 2.14. The default
1309 behaviour from release 2.14 onwards is to reject such input files, and
1310 so the @samp{--accept-unknown-input-arch} option has been added to
1311 restore the old behaviour.
1312
1313 @kindex --as-needed
1314 @kindex --no-as-needed
1315 @item --as-needed
1316 @itemx --no-as-needed
1317 This option affects ELF DT_NEEDED tags for dynamic libraries mentioned
1318 on the command line after the @option{--as-needed} option. Normally
1319 the linker will add a DT_NEEDED tag for each dynamic library mentioned
1320 on the command line, regardless of whether the library is actually
1321 needed or not. @option{--as-needed} causes a DT_NEEDED tag to only be
1322 emitted for a library that @emph{at that point in the link} satisfies a
1323 non-weak undefined symbol reference from a regular object file or, if
1324 the library is not found in the DT_NEEDED lists of other needed libraries, a
1325 non-weak undefined symbol reference from another needed dynamic library.
1326 Object files or libraries appearing on the command line @emph{after}
1327 the library in question do not affect whether the library is seen as
1328 needed. This is similar to the rules for extraction of object files
1329 from archives. @option{--no-as-needed} restores the default behaviour.
1330
1331 @kindex --add-needed
1332 @kindex --no-add-needed
1333 @item --add-needed
1334 @itemx --no-add-needed
1335 These two options have been deprecated because of the similarity of
1336 their names to the @option{--as-needed} and @option{--no-as-needed}
1337 options. They have been replaced by @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
1338 and @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
1339
1340 @kindex -assert @var{keyword}
1341 @item -assert @var{keyword}
1342 This option is ignored for SunOS compatibility.
1343
1344 @kindex -Bdynamic
1345 @kindex -dy
1346 @kindex -call_shared
1347 @item -Bdynamic
1348 @itemx -dy
1349 @itemx -call_shared
1350 Link against dynamic libraries. This is only meaningful on platforms
1351 for which shared libraries are supported. This option is normally the
1352 default on such platforms. The different variants of this option are
1353 for compatibility with various systems. You may use this option
1354 multiple times on the command line: it affects library searching for
1355 @option{-l} options which follow it.
1356
1357 @kindex -Bgroup
1358 @item -Bgroup
1359 Set the @code{DF_1_GROUP} flag in the @code{DT_FLAGS_1} entry in the dynamic
1360 section. This causes the runtime linker to handle lookups in this
1361 object and its dependencies to be performed only inside the group.
1362 @option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all} is implied. This option is
1363 only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared libraries.
1364
1365 @kindex -Bstatic
1366 @kindex -dn
1367 @kindex -non_shared
1368 @kindex -static
1369 @item -Bstatic
1370 @itemx -dn
1371 @itemx -non_shared
1372 @itemx -static
1373 Do not link against shared libraries. This is only meaningful on
1374 platforms for which shared libraries are supported. The different
1375 variants of this option are for compatibility with various systems. You
1376 may use this option multiple times on the command line: it affects
1377 library searching for @option{-l} options which follow it. This
1378 option also implies @option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all}. This
1379 option can be used with @option{-shared}. Doing so means that a
1380 shared library is being created but that all of the library's external
1381 references must be resolved by pulling in entries from static
1382 libraries.
1383
1384 @kindex -Bsymbolic
1385 @item -Bsymbolic
1386 When creating a shared library, bind references to global symbols to the
1387 definition within the shared library, if any. Normally, it is possible
1388 for a program linked against a shared library to override the definition
1389 within the shared library. This option can also be used with the
1390 @option{--export-dynamic} option, when creating a position independent
1391 executable, to bind references to global symbols to the definition within
1392 the executable. This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms which
1393 support shared libraries and position independent executables.
1394
1395 @kindex -Bsymbolic-functions
1396 @item -Bsymbolic-functions
1397 When creating a shared library, bind references to global function
1398 symbols to the definition within the shared library, if any.
1399 This option can also be used with the @option{--export-dynamic} option,
1400 when creating a position independent executable, to bind references
1401 to global function symbols to the definition within the executable.
1402 This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared
1403 libraries and position independent executables.
1404
1405 @kindex --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1406 @item --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1407 Specify the name of a dynamic list file to the linker. This is
1408 typically used when creating shared libraries to specify a list of
1409 global symbols whose references shouldn't be bound to the definition
1410 within the shared library, or creating dynamically linked executables
1411 to specify a list of symbols which should be added to the symbol table
1412 in the executable. This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms
1413 which support shared libraries.
1414
1415 The format of the dynamic list is the same as the version node without
1416 scope and node name. See @ref{VERSION} for more information.
1417
1418 @kindex --dynamic-list-data
1419 @item --dynamic-list-data
1420 Include all global data symbols to the dynamic list.
1421
1422 @kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1423 @item --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1424 Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ operator new and delete. It
1425 is mainly useful for building shared libstdc++.
1426
1427 @kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1428 @item --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1429 Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ runtime type identification.
1430
1431 @kindex --check-sections
1432 @kindex --no-check-sections
1433 @item --check-sections
1434 @itemx --no-check-sections
1435 Asks the linker @emph{not} to check section addresses after they have
1436 been assigned to see if there are any overlaps. Normally the linker will
1437 perform this check, and if it finds any overlaps it will produce
1438 suitable error messages. The linker does know about, and does make
1439 allowances for sections in overlays. The default behaviour can be
1440 restored by using the command-line switch @option{--check-sections}.
1441 Section overlap is not usually checked for relocatable links. You can
1442 force checking in that case by using the @option{--check-sections}
1443 option.
1444
1445 @kindex --copy-dt-needed-entries
1446 @kindex --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
1447 @item --copy-dt-needed-entries
1448 @itemx --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
1449 This option affects the treatment of dynamic libraries referred to
1450 by DT_NEEDED tags @emph{inside} ELF dynamic libraries mentioned on the
1451 command line. Normally the linker won't add a DT_NEEDED tag to the
1452 output binary for each library mentioned in a DT_NEEDED tag in an
1453 input dynamic library. With @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
1454 specified on the command line however any dynamic libraries that
1455 follow it will have their DT_NEEDED entries added. The default
1456 behaviour can be restored with @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
1457
1458 This option also has an effect on the resolution of symbols in dynamic
1459 libraries. With @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries} dynamic libraries
1460 mentioned on the command line will be recursively searched, following
1461 their DT_NEEDED tags to other libraries, in order to resolve symbols
1462 required by the output binary. With the default setting however
1463 the searching of dynamic libraries that follow it will stop with the
1464 dynamic library itself. No DT_NEEDED links will be traversed to resolve
1465 symbols.
1466
1467 @cindex cross reference table
1468 @kindex --cref
1469 @item --cref
1470 Output a cross reference table. If a linker map file is being
1471 generated, the cross reference table is printed to the map file.
1472 Otherwise, it is printed on the standard output.
1473
1474 The format of the table is intentionally simple, so that it may be
1475 easily processed by a script if necessary. The symbols are printed out,
1476 sorted by name. For each symbol, a list of file names is given. If the
1477 symbol is defined, the first file listed is the location of the
1478 definition. If the symbol is defined as a common value then any files
1479 where this happens appear next. Finally any files that reference the
1480 symbol are listed.
1481
1482 @cindex common allocation
1483 @kindex --no-define-common
1484 @item --no-define-common
1485 This option inhibits the assignment of addresses to common symbols.
1486 The script command @code{INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
1487 @xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
1488
1489 The @samp{--no-define-common} option allows decoupling
1490 the decision to assign addresses to Common symbols from the choice
1491 of the output file type; otherwise a non-Relocatable output type
1492 forces assigning addresses to Common symbols.
1493 Using @samp{--no-define-common} allows Common symbols that are referenced
1494 from a shared library to be assigned addresses only in the main program.
1495 This eliminates the unused duplicate space in the shared library,
1496 and also prevents any possible confusion over resolving to the wrong
1497 duplicate when there are many dynamic modules with specialized search
1498 paths for runtime symbol resolution.
1499
1500 @cindex group allocation in linker script
1501 @cindex section groups
1502 @cindex COMDAT
1503 @kindex --force-group-allocation
1504 @item --force-group-allocation
1505 This option causes the linker to place section group members like
1506 normal input sections, and to delete the section groups. This is the
1507 default behaviour for a final link but this option can be used to
1508 change the behaviour of a relocatable link (@samp{-r}). The script
1509 command @code{FORCE_GROUP_ALLOCATION} has the same
1510 effect. @xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
1511
1512 @cindex symbols, from command line
1513 @kindex --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{exp}
1514 @item --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{expression}
1515 Create a global symbol in the output file, containing the absolute
1516 address given by @var{expression}. You may use this option as many
1517 times as necessary to define multiple symbols in the command line. A
1518 limited form of arithmetic is supported for the @var{expression} in this
1519 context: you may give a hexadecimal constant or the name of an existing
1520 symbol, or use @code{+} and @code{-} to add or subtract hexadecimal
1521 constants or symbols. If you need more elaborate expressions, consider
1522 using the linker command language from a script (@pxref{Assignments}).
1523 @emph{Note:} there should be no white space between @var{symbol}, the
1524 equals sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{expression}.
1525
1526 @cindex demangling, from command line
1527 @kindex --demangle[=@var{style}]
1528 @kindex --no-demangle
1529 @item --demangle[=@var{style}]
1530 @itemx --no-demangle
1531 These options control whether to demangle symbol names in error messages
1532 and other output. When the linker is told to demangle, it tries to
1533 present symbol names in a readable fashion: it strips leading
1534 underscores if they are used by the object file format, and converts C++
1535 mangled symbol names into user readable names. Different compilers have
1536 different mangling styles. The optional demangling style argument can be used
1537 to choose an appropriate demangling style for your compiler. The linker will
1538 demangle by default unless the environment variable @samp{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}
1539 is set. These options may be used to override the default.
1540
1541 @cindex dynamic linker, from command line
1542 @kindex -I@var{file}
1543 @kindex --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
1544 @item -I@var{file}
1545 @itemx --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
1546 Set the name of the dynamic linker. This is only meaningful when
1547 generating dynamically linked ELF executables. The default dynamic
1548 linker is normally correct; don't use this unless you know what you are
1549 doing.
1550
1551 @kindex --no-dynamic-linker
1552 @item --no-dynamic-linker
1553 When producing an executable file, omit the request for a dynamic
1554 linker to be used at load-time. This is only meaningful for ELF
1555 executables that contain dynamic relocations, and usually requires
1556 entry point code that is capable of processing these relocations.
1557
1558 @kindex --embedded-relocs
1559 @item --embedded-relocs
1560 This option is similar to the @option{--emit-relocs} option except
1561 that the relocs are stored in a target specific section. This option
1562 is only supported by the @samp{BFIN}, @samp{CR16} and @emph{M68K}
1563 targets.
1564
1565 @kindex --disable-multiple-abs-defs
1566 @item --disable-multiple-abs-defs
1567 Do not allow multiple definitions with symbols included
1568 in filename invoked by -R or --just-symbols
1569
1570 @kindex --fatal-warnings
1571 @kindex --no-fatal-warnings
1572 @item --fatal-warnings
1573 @itemx --no-fatal-warnings
1574 Treat all warnings as errors. The default behaviour can be restored
1575 with the option @option{--no-fatal-warnings}.
1576
1577 @kindex --force-exe-suffix
1578 @item --force-exe-suffix
1579 Make sure that an output file has a .exe suffix.
1580
1581 If a successfully built fully linked output file does not have a
1582 @code{.exe} or @code{.dll} suffix, this option forces the linker to copy
1583 the output file to one of the same name with a @code{.exe} suffix. This
1584 option is useful when using unmodified Unix makefiles on a Microsoft
1585 Windows host, since some versions of Windows won't run an image unless
1586 it ends in a @code{.exe} suffix.
1587
1588 @kindex --gc-sections
1589 @kindex --no-gc-sections
1590 @cindex garbage collection
1591 @item --gc-sections
1592 @itemx --no-gc-sections
1593 Enable garbage collection of unused input sections. It is ignored on
1594 targets that do not support this option. The default behaviour (of not
1595 performing this garbage collection) can be restored by specifying
1596 @samp{--no-gc-sections} on the command line. Note that garbage
1597 collection for COFF and PE format targets is supported, but the
1598 implementation is currently considered to be experimental.
1599
1600 @samp{--gc-sections} decides which input sections are used by
1601 examining symbols and relocations. The section containing the entry
1602 symbol and all sections containing symbols undefined on the
1603 command-line will be kept, as will sections containing symbols
1604 referenced by dynamic objects. Note that when building shared
1605 libraries, the linker must assume that any visible symbol is
1606 referenced. Once this initial set of sections has been determined,
1607 the linker recursively marks as used any section referenced by their
1608 relocations. See @samp{--entry} and @samp{--undefined}.
1609
1610 This option can be set when doing a partial link (enabled with option
1611 @samp{-r}). In this case the root of symbols kept must be explicitly
1612 specified either by an @samp{--entry} or @samp{--undefined} option or by
1613 a @code{ENTRY} command in the linker script.
1614
1615 @kindex --print-gc-sections
1616 @kindex --no-print-gc-sections
1617 @cindex garbage collection
1618 @item --print-gc-sections
1619 @itemx --no-print-gc-sections
1620 List all sections removed by garbage collection. The listing is
1621 printed on stderr. This option is only effective if garbage
1622 collection has been enabled via the @samp{--gc-sections}) option. The
1623 default behaviour (of not listing the sections that are removed) can
1624 be restored by specifying @samp{--no-print-gc-sections} on the command
1625 line.
1626
1627 @kindex --gc-keep-exported
1628 @cindex garbage collection
1629 @item --gc-keep-exported
1630 When @samp{--gc-sections} is enabled, this option prevents garbage
1631 collection of unused input sections that contain global symbols having
1632 default or protected visibility. This option is intended to be used for
1633 executables where unreferenced sections would otherwise be garbage
1634 collected regardless of the external visibility of contained symbols.
1635 Note that this option has no effect when linking shared objects since
1636 it is already the default behaviour. This option is only supported for
1637 ELF format targets.
1638
1639 @kindex --print-output-format
1640 @cindex output format
1641 @item --print-output-format
1642 Print the name of the default output format (perhaps influenced by
1643 other command-line options). This is the string that would appear
1644 in an @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} linker script command (@pxref{File Commands}).
1645
1646 @kindex --print-memory-usage
1647 @cindex memory usage
1648 @item --print-memory-usage
1649 Print used size, total size and used size of memory regions created with
1650 the @ref{MEMORY} command. This is useful on embedded targets to have a
1651 quick view of amount of free memory. The format of the output has one
1652 headline and one line per region. It is both human readable and easily
1653 parsable by tools. Here is an example of an output:
1654
1655 @smallexample
1656 Memory region Used Size Region Size %age Used
1657 ROM: 256 KB 1 MB 25.00%
1658 RAM: 32 B 2 GB 0.00%
1659 @end smallexample
1660
1661 @cindex help
1662 @cindex usage
1663 @kindex --help
1664 @item --help
1665 Print a summary of the command-line options on the standard output and exit.
1666
1667 @kindex --target-help
1668 @item --target-help
1669 Print a summary of all target specific options on the standard output and exit.
1670
1671 @kindex -Map=@var{mapfile}
1672 @item -Map=@var{mapfile}
1673 Print a link map to the file @var{mapfile}. See the description of the
1674 @option{-M} option, above.
1675
1676 @cindex memory usage
1677 @kindex --no-keep-memory
1678 @item --no-keep-memory
1679 @command{ld} normally optimizes for speed over memory usage by caching the
1680 symbol tables of input files in memory. This option tells @command{ld} to
1681 instead optimize for memory usage, by rereading the symbol tables as
1682 necessary. This may be required if @command{ld} runs out of memory space
1683 while linking a large executable.
1684
1685 @kindex --no-undefined
1686 @kindex -z defs
1687 @kindex -z undefs
1688 @item --no-undefined
1689 @itemx -z defs
1690 Report unresolved symbol references from regular object files. This
1691 is done even if the linker is creating a non-symbolic shared library.
1692 The switch @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} controls the
1693 behaviour for reporting unresolved references found in shared
1694 libraries being linked in.
1695
1696 The effects of this option can be reverted by using @code{-z undefs}.
1697
1698 @kindex --allow-multiple-definition
1699 @kindex -z muldefs
1700 @item --allow-multiple-definition
1701 @itemx -z muldefs
1702 Normally when a symbol is defined multiple times, the linker will
1703 report a fatal error. These options allow multiple definitions and the
1704 first definition will be used.
1705
1706 @kindex --allow-shlib-undefined
1707 @kindex --no-allow-shlib-undefined
1708 @item --allow-shlib-undefined
1709 @itemx --no-allow-shlib-undefined
1710 Allows or disallows undefined symbols in shared libraries.
1711 This switch is similar to @option{--no-undefined} except that it
1712 determines the behaviour when the undefined symbols are in a
1713 shared library rather than a regular object file. It does not affect
1714 how undefined symbols in regular object files are handled.
1715
1716 The default behaviour is to report errors for any undefined symbols
1717 referenced in shared libraries if the linker is being used to create
1718 an executable, but to allow them if the linker is being used to create
1719 a shared library.
1720
1721 The reasons for allowing undefined symbol references in shared
1722 libraries specified at link time are that:
1723
1724 @itemize @bullet
1725 @item
1726 A shared library specified at link time may not be the same as the one
1727 that is available at load time, so the symbol might actually be
1728 resolvable at load time.
1729 @item
1730 There are some operating systems, eg BeOS and HPPA, where undefined
1731 symbols in shared libraries are normal.
1732
1733 The BeOS kernel for example patches shared libraries at load time to
1734 select whichever function is most appropriate for the current
1735 architecture. This is used, for example, to dynamically select an
1736 appropriate memset function.
1737 @end itemize
1738
1739 @kindex --no-undefined-version
1740 @item --no-undefined-version
1741 Normally when a symbol has an undefined version, the linker will ignore
1742 it. This option disallows symbols with undefined version and a fatal error
1743 will be issued instead.
1744
1745 @kindex --default-symver
1746 @item --default-symver
1747 Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
1748 exported symbols.
1749
1750 @kindex --default-imported-symver
1751 @item --default-imported-symver
1752 Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
1753 imported symbols.
1754
1755 @kindex --no-warn-mismatch
1756 @item --no-warn-mismatch
1757 Normally @command{ld} will give an error if you try to link together input
1758 files that are mismatched for some reason, perhaps because they have
1759 been compiled for different processors or for different endiannesses.
1760 This option tells @command{ld} that it should silently permit such possible
1761 errors. This option should only be used with care, in cases when you
1762 have taken some special action that ensures that the linker errors are
1763 inappropriate.
1764
1765 @kindex --no-warn-search-mismatch
1766 @item --no-warn-search-mismatch
1767 Normally @command{ld} will give a warning if it finds an incompatible
1768 library during a library search. This option silences the warning.
1769
1770 @kindex --no-whole-archive
1771 @item --no-whole-archive
1772 Turn off the effect of the @option{--whole-archive} option for subsequent
1773 archive files.
1774
1775 @cindex output file after errors
1776 @kindex --noinhibit-exec
1777 @item --noinhibit-exec
1778 Retain the executable output file whenever it is still usable.
1779 Normally, the linker will not produce an output file if it encounters
1780 errors during the link process; it exits without writing an output file
1781 when it issues any error whatsoever.
1782
1783 @kindex -nostdlib
1784 @item -nostdlib
1785 Only search library directories explicitly specified on the
1786 command line. Library directories specified in linker scripts
1787 (including linker scripts specified on the command line) are ignored.
1788
1789 @ifclear SingleFormat
1790 @kindex --oformat=@var{output-format}
1791 @item --oformat=@var{output-format}
1792 @command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
1793 file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
1794 @samp{--oformat} option to specify the binary format for the output
1795 object file. Even when @command{ld} is configured to support alternative
1796 object formats, you don't usually need to specify this, as @command{ld}
1797 should be configured to produce as a default output format the most
1798 usual format on each machine. @var{output-format} is a text string, the
1799 name of a particular format supported by the BFD libraries. (You can
1800 list the available binary formats with @samp{objdump -i}.) The script
1801 command @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} can also specify the output format, but
1802 this option overrides it. @xref{BFD}.
1803 @end ifclear
1804
1805 @kindex --out-implib
1806 @item --out-implib @var{file}
1807 Create an import library in @var{file} corresponding to the executable
1808 the linker is generating (eg. a DLL or ELF program). This import
1809 library (which should be called @code{*.dll.a} or @code{*.a} for DLLs)
1810 may be used to link clients against the generated executable; this
1811 behaviour makes it possible to skip a separate import library creation
1812 step (eg. @code{dlltool} for DLLs). This option is only available for
1813 the i386 PE and ELF targetted ports of the linker.
1814
1815 @kindex -pie
1816 @kindex --pic-executable
1817 @item -pie
1818 @itemx --pic-executable
1819 @cindex position independent executables
1820 Create a position independent executable. This is currently only supported on
1821 ELF platforms. Position independent executables are similar to shared
1822 libraries in that they are relocated by the dynamic linker to the virtual
1823 address the OS chooses for them (which can vary between invocations). Like
1824 normal dynamically linked executables they can be executed and symbols
1825 defined in the executable cannot be overridden by shared libraries.
1826
1827 @kindex -qmagic
1828 @item -qmagic
1829 This option is ignored for Linux compatibility.
1830
1831 @kindex -Qy
1832 @item -Qy
1833 This option is ignored for SVR4 compatibility.
1834
1835 @kindex --relax
1836 @cindex synthesizing linker
1837 @cindex relaxing addressing modes
1838 @cindex --no-relax
1839 @item --relax
1840 @itemx --no-relax
1841 An option with machine dependent effects.
1842 @ifset GENERIC
1843 This option is only supported on a few targets.
1844 @end ifset
1845 @ifset H8300
1846 @xref{H8/300,,@command{ld} and the H8/300}.
1847 @end ifset
1848 @ifset XTENSA
1849 @xref{Xtensa,, @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors}.
1850 @end ifset
1851 @ifset M68HC11
1852 @xref{M68HC11/68HC12,,@command{ld} and the 68HC11 and 68HC12}.
1853 @end ifset
1854 @ifset NIOSII
1855 @xref{Nios II,,@command{ld} and the Altera Nios II}.
1856 @end ifset
1857 @ifset POWERPC
1858 @xref{PowerPC ELF32,,@command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support}.
1859 @end ifset
1860
1861 On some platforms the @samp{--relax} option performs target specific,
1862 global optimizations that become possible when the linker resolves
1863 addressing in the program, such as relaxing address modes,
1864 synthesizing new instructions, selecting shorter version of current
1865 instructions, and combining constant values.
1866
1867 On some platforms these link time global optimizations may make symbolic
1868 debugging of the resulting executable impossible.
1869 @ifset GENERIC
1870 This is known to be the case for the Matsushita MN10200 and MN10300
1871 family of processors.
1872 @end ifset
1873
1874 @ifset GENERIC
1875 On platforms where this is not supported, @samp{--relax} is accepted,
1876 but ignored.
1877 @end ifset
1878
1879 On platforms where @samp{--relax} is accepted the option
1880 @samp{--no-relax} can be used to disable the feature.
1881
1882 @cindex retaining specified symbols
1883 @cindex stripping all but some symbols
1884 @cindex symbols, retaining selectively
1885 @kindex --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
1886 @item --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
1887 Retain @emph{only} the symbols listed in the file @var{filename},
1888 discarding all others. @var{filename} is simply a flat file, with one
1889 symbol name per line. This option is especially useful in environments
1890 @ifset GENERIC
1891 (such as VxWorks)
1892 @end ifset
1893 where a large global symbol table is accumulated gradually, to conserve
1894 run-time memory.
1895
1896 @samp{--retain-symbols-file} does @emph{not} discard undefined symbols,
1897 or symbols needed for relocations.
1898
1899 You may only specify @samp{--retain-symbols-file} once in the command
1900 line. It overrides @samp{-s} and @samp{-S}.
1901
1902 @ifset GENERIC
1903 @item -rpath=@var{dir}
1904 @cindex runtime library search path
1905 @kindex -rpath=@var{dir}
1906 Add a directory to the runtime library search path. This is used when
1907 linking an ELF executable with shared objects. All @option{-rpath}
1908 arguments are concatenated and passed to the runtime linker, which uses
1909 them to locate shared objects at runtime. The @option{-rpath} option is
1910 also used when locating shared objects which are needed by shared
1911 objects explicitly included in the link; see the description of the
1912 @option{-rpath-link} option. If @option{-rpath} is not used when linking an
1913 ELF executable, the contents of the environment variable
1914 @code{LD_RUN_PATH} will be used if it is defined.
1915
1916 The @option{-rpath} option may also be used on SunOS. By default, on
1917 SunOS, the linker will form a runtime search path out of all the
1918 @option{-L} options it is given. If a @option{-rpath} option is used, the
1919 runtime search path will be formed exclusively using the @option{-rpath}
1920 options, ignoring the @option{-L} options. This can be useful when using
1921 gcc, which adds many @option{-L} options which may be on NFS mounted
1922 file systems.
1923
1924 For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
1925 followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
1926 the @option{-rpath} option.
1927 @end ifset
1928
1929 @ifset GENERIC
1930 @cindex link-time runtime library search path
1931 @kindex -rpath-link=@var{dir}
1932 @item -rpath-link=@var{dir}
1933 When using ELF or SunOS, one shared library may require another. This
1934 happens when an @code{ld -shared} link includes a shared library as one
1935 of the input files.
1936
1937 When the linker encounters such a dependency when doing a non-shared,
1938 non-relocatable link, it will automatically try to locate the required
1939 shared library and include it in the link, if it is not included
1940 explicitly. In such a case, the @option{-rpath-link} option
1941 specifies the first set of directories to search. The
1942 @option{-rpath-link} option may specify a sequence of directory names
1943 either by specifying a list of names separated by colons, or by
1944 appearing multiple times.
1945
1946 The tokens @var{$ORIGIN} and @var{$LIB} can appear in these search
1947 directories. They will be replaced by the full path to the directory
1948 containing the program or shared object in the case of @var{$ORIGIN}
1949 and either @samp{lib} - for 32-bit binaries - or @samp{lib64} - for
1950 64-bit binaries - in the case of @var{$LIB}.
1951
1952 The alternative form of these tokens - @var{$@{ORIGIN@}} and
1953 @var{$@{LIB@}} can also be used. The token @var{$PLATFORM} is not
1954 supported.
1955
1956 This option should be used with caution as it overrides the search path
1957 that may have been hard compiled into a shared library. In such a case it
1958 is possible to use unintentionally a different search path than the
1959 runtime linker would do.
1960
1961 The linker uses the following search paths to locate required shared
1962 libraries:
1963 @enumerate
1964 @item
1965 Any directories specified by @option{-rpath-link} options.
1966 @item
1967 Any directories specified by @option{-rpath} options. The difference
1968 between @option{-rpath} and @option{-rpath-link} is that directories
1969 specified by @option{-rpath} options are included in the executable and
1970 used at runtime, whereas the @option{-rpath-link} option is only effective
1971 at link time. Searching @option{-rpath} in this way is only supported
1972 by native linkers and cross linkers which have been configured with
1973 the @option{--with-sysroot} option.
1974 @item
1975 On an ELF system, for native linkers, if the @option{-rpath} and
1976 @option{-rpath-link} options were not used, search the contents of the
1977 environment variable @code{LD_RUN_PATH}.
1978 @item
1979 On SunOS, if the @option{-rpath} option was not used, search any
1980 directories specified using @option{-L} options.
1981 @item
1982 For a native linker, search the contents of the environment
1983 variable @code{LD_LIBRARY_PATH}.
1984 @item
1985 For a native ELF linker, the directories in @code{DT_RUNPATH} or
1986 @code{DT_RPATH} of a shared library are searched for shared
1987 libraries needed by it. The @code{DT_RPATH} entries are ignored if
1988 @code{DT_RUNPATH} entries exist.
1989 @item
1990 The default directories, normally @file{/lib} and @file{/usr/lib}.
1991 @item
1992 For a native linker on an ELF system, if the file @file{/etc/ld.so.conf}
1993 exists, the list of directories found in that file.
1994 @end enumerate
1995
1996 If the required shared library is not found, the linker will issue a
1997 warning and continue with the link.
1998 @end ifset
1999
2000 @kindex -shared
2001 @kindex -Bshareable
2002 @item -shared
2003 @itemx -Bshareable
2004 @cindex shared libraries
2005 Create a shared library. This is currently only supported on ELF, XCOFF
2006 and SunOS platforms. On SunOS, the linker will automatically create a
2007 shared library if the @option{-e} option is not used and there are
2008 undefined symbols in the link.
2009
2010 @kindex --sort-common
2011 @item --sort-common
2012 @itemx --sort-common=ascending
2013 @itemx --sort-common=descending
2014 This option tells @command{ld} to sort the common symbols by alignment in
2015 ascending or descending order when it places them in the appropriate output
2016 sections. The symbol alignments considered are sixteen-byte or larger,
2017 eight-byte, four-byte, two-byte, and one-byte. This is to prevent gaps
2018 between symbols due to alignment constraints. If no sorting order is
2019 specified, then descending order is assumed.
2020
2021 @kindex --sort-section=name
2022 @item --sort-section=name
2023 This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_NAME} to all wildcard section
2024 patterns in the linker script.
2025
2026 @kindex --sort-section=alignment
2027 @item --sort-section=alignment
2028 This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} to all wildcard section
2029 patterns in the linker script.
2030
2031 @kindex --spare-dynamic-tags
2032 @item --spare-dynamic-tags=@var{count}
2033 This option specifies the number of empty slots to leave in the
2034 .dynamic section of ELF shared objects. Empty slots may be needed by
2035 post processing tools, such as the prelinker. The default is 5.
2036
2037 @kindex --split-by-file
2038 @item --split-by-file[=@var{size}]
2039 Similar to @option{--split-by-reloc} but creates a new output section for
2040 each input file when @var{size} is reached. @var{size} defaults to a
2041 size of 1 if not given.
2042
2043 @kindex --split-by-reloc
2044 @item --split-by-reloc[=@var{count}]
2045 Tries to creates extra sections in the output file so that no single
2046 output section in the file contains more than @var{count} relocations.
2047 This is useful when generating huge relocatable files for downloading into
2048 certain real time kernels with the COFF object file format; since COFF
2049 cannot represent more than 65535 relocations in a single section. Note
2050 that this will fail to work with object file formats which do not
2051 support arbitrary sections. The linker will not split up individual
2052 input sections for redistribution, so if a single input section contains
2053 more than @var{count} relocations one output section will contain that
2054 many relocations. @var{count} defaults to a value of 32768.
2055
2056 @kindex --stats
2057 @item --stats
2058 Compute and display statistics about the operation of the linker, such
2059 as execution time and memory usage.
2060
2061 @kindex --sysroot=@var{directory}
2062 @item --sysroot=@var{directory}
2063 Use @var{directory} as the location of the sysroot, overriding the
2064 configure-time default. This option is only supported by linkers
2065 that were configured using @option{--with-sysroot}.
2066
2067 @kindex --task-link
2068 @item --task-link
2069 This is used by COFF/PE based targets to create a task-linked object
2070 file where all of the global symbols have been converted to statics.
2071
2072 @kindex --traditional-format
2073 @cindex traditional format
2074 @item --traditional-format
2075 For some targets, the output of @command{ld} is different in some ways from
2076 the output of some existing linker. This switch requests @command{ld} to
2077 use the traditional format instead.
2078
2079 @cindex dbx
2080 For example, on SunOS, @command{ld} combines duplicate entries in the
2081 symbol string table. This can reduce the size of an output file with
2082 full debugging information by over 30 percent. Unfortunately, the SunOS
2083 @code{dbx} program can not read the resulting program (@code{gdb} has no
2084 trouble). The @samp{--traditional-format} switch tells @command{ld} to not
2085 combine duplicate entries.
2086
2087 @kindex --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
2088 @item --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
2089 Locate a section in the output file at the absolute
2090 address given by @var{org}. You may use this option as many
2091 times as necessary to locate multiple sections in the command
2092 line.
2093 @var{org} must be a single hexadecimal integer;
2094 for compatibility with other linkers, you may omit the leading
2095 @samp{0x} usually associated with hexadecimal values. @emph{Note:} there
2096 should be no white space between @var{sectionname}, the equals
2097 sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{org}.
2098
2099 @kindex -Tbss=@var{org}
2100 @kindex -Tdata=@var{org}
2101 @kindex -Ttext=@var{org}
2102 @cindex segment origins, cmd line
2103 @item -Tbss=@var{org}
2104 @itemx -Tdata=@var{org}
2105 @itemx -Ttext=@var{org}
2106 Same as @option{--section-start}, with @code{.bss}, @code{.data} or
2107 @code{.text} as the @var{sectionname}.
2108
2109 @kindex -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
2110 @item -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
2111 @cindex text segment origin, cmd line
2112 When creating an ELF executable, it will set the address of the first
2113 byte of the text segment.
2114
2115 @kindex -Trodata-segment=@var{org}
2116 @item -Trodata-segment=@var{org}
2117 @cindex rodata segment origin, cmd line
2118 When creating an ELF executable or shared object for a target where
2119 the read-only data is in its own segment separate from the executable
2120 text, it will set the address of the first byte of the read-only data segment.
2121
2122 @kindex -Tldata-segment=@var{org}
2123 @item -Tldata-segment=@var{org}
2124 @cindex ldata segment origin, cmd line
2125 When creating an ELF executable or shared object for x86-64 medium memory
2126 model, it will set the address of the first byte of the ldata segment.
2127
2128 @kindex --unresolved-symbols
2129 @item --unresolved-symbols=@var{method}
2130 Determine how to handle unresolved symbols. There are four possible
2131 values for @samp{method}:
2132
2133 @table @samp
2134 @item ignore-all
2135 Do not report any unresolved symbols.
2136
2137 @item report-all
2138 Report all unresolved symbols. This is the default.
2139
2140 @item ignore-in-object-files
2141 Report unresolved symbols that are contained in shared libraries, but
2142 ignore them if they come from regular object files.
2143
2144 @item ignore-in-shared-libs
2145 Report unresolved symbols that come from regular object files, but
2146 ignore them if they come from shared libraries. This can be useful
2147 when creating a dynamic binary and it is known that all the shared
2148 libraries that it should be referencing are included on the linker's
2149 command line.
2150 @end table
2151
2152 The behaviour for shared libraries on their own can also be controlled
2153 by the @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} option.
2154
2155 Normally the linker will generate an error message for each reported
2156 unresolved symbol but the option @option{--warn-unresolved-symbols}
2157 can change this to a warning.
2158
2159 @kindex --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
2160 @cindex verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
2161 @item --dll-verbose
2162 @itemx --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
2163 Display the version number for @command{ld} and list the linker emulations
2164 supported. Display which input files can and cannot be opened. Display
2165 the linker script being used by the linker. If the optional @var{NUMBER}
2166 argument > 1, plugin symbol status will also be displayed.
2167
2168 @kindex --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
2169 @cindex version script, symbol versions
2170 @item --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
2171 Specify the name of a version script to the linker. This is typically
2172 used when creating shared libraries to specify additional information
2173 about the version hierarchy for the library being created. This option
2174 is only fully supported on ELF platforms which support shared libraries;
2175 see @ref{VERSION}. It is partially supported on PE platforms, which can
2176 use version scripts to filter symbol visibility in auto-export mode: any
2177 symbols marked @samp{local} in the version script will not be exported.
2178 @xref{WIN32}.
2179
2180 @kindex --warn-common
2181 @cindex warnings, on combining symbols
2182 @cindex combining symbols, warnings on
2183 @item --warn-common
2184 Warn when a common symbol is combined with another common symbol or with
2185 a symbol definition. Unix linkers allow this somewhat sloppy practice,
2186 but linkers on some other operating systems do not. This option allows
2187 you to find potential problems from combining global symbols.
2188 Unfortunately, some C libraries use this practice, so you may get some
2189 warnings about symbols in the libraries as well as in your programs.
2190
2191 There are three kinds of global symbols, illustrated here by C examples:
2192
2193 @table @samp
2194 @item int i = 1;
2195 A definition, which goes in the initialized data section of the output
2196 file.
2197
2198 @item extern int i;
2199 An undefined reference, which does not allocate space.
2200 There must be either a definition or a common symbol for the
2201 variable somewhere.
2202
2203 @item int i;
2204 A common symbol. If there are only (one or more) common symbols for a
2205 variable, it goes in the uninitialized data area of the output file.
2206 The linker merges multiple common symbols for the same variable into a
2207 single symbol. If they are of different sizes, it picks the largest
2208 size. The linker turns a common symbol into a declaration, if there is
2209 a definition of the same variable.
2210 @end table
2211
2212 The @samp{--warn-common} option can produce five kinds of warnings.
2213 Each warning consists of a pair of lines: the first describes the symbol
2214 just encountered, and the second describes the previous symbol
2215 encountered with the same name. One or both of the two symbols will be
2216 a common symbol.
2217
2218 @enumerate
2219 @item
2220 Turning a common symbol into a reference, because there is already a
2221 definition for the symbol.
2222 @smallexample
2223 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2224 overridden by definition
2225 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: defined here
2226 @end smallexample
2227
2228 @item
2229 Turning a common symbol into a reference, because a later definition for
2230 the symbol is encountered. This is the same as the previous case,
2231 except that the symbols are encountered in a different order.
2232 @smallexample
2233 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: definition of `@var{symbol}'
2234 overriding common
2235 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common is here
2236 @end smallexample
2237
2238 @item
2239 Merging a common symbol with a previous same-sized common symbol.
2240 @smallexample
2241 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: multiple common
2242 of `@var{symbol}'
2243 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: previous common is here
2244 @end smallexample
2245
2246 @item
2247 Merging a common symbol with a previous larger common symbol.
2248 @smallexample
2249 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2250 overridden by larger common
2251 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: larger common is here
2252 @end smallexample
2253
2254 @item
2255 Merging a common symbol with a previous smaller common symbol. This is
2256 the same as the previous case, except that the symbols are
2257 encountered in a different order.
2258 @smallexample
2259 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2260 overriding smaller common
2261 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: smaller common is here
2262 @end smallexample
2263 @end enumerate
2264
2265 @kindex --warn-constructors
2266 @item --warn-constructors
2267 Warn if any global constructors are used. This is only useful for a few
2268 object file formats. For formats like COFF or ELF, the linker can not
2269 detect the use of global constructors.
2270
2271 @kindex --warn-multiple-gp
2272 @item --warn-multiple-gp
2273 Warn if multiple global pointer values are required in the output file.
2274 This is only meaningful for certain processors, such as the Alpha.
2275 Specifically, some processors put large-valued constants in a special
2276 section. A special register (the global pointer) points into the middle
2277 of this section, so that constants can be loaded efficiently via a
2278 base-register relative addressing mode. Since the offset in
2279 base-register relative mode is fixed and relatively small (e.g., 16
2280 bits), this limits the maximum size of the constant pool. Thus, in
2281 large programs, it is often necessary to use multiple global pointer
2282 values in order to be able to address all possible constants. This
2283 option causes a warning to be issued whenever this case occurs.
2284
2285 @kindex --warn-once
2286 @cindex warnings, on undefined symbols
2287 @cindex undefined symbols, warnings on
2288 @item --warn-once
2289 Only warn once for each undefined symbol, rather than once per module
2290 which refers to it.
2291
2292 @kindex --warn-section-align
2293 @cindex warnings, on section alignment
2294 @cindex section alignment, warnings on
2295 @item --warn-section-align
2296 Warn if the address of an output section is changed because of
2297 alignment. Typically, the alignment will be set by an input section.
2298 The address will only be changed if it not explicitly specified; that
2299 is, if the @code{SECTIONS} command does not specify a start address for
2300 the section (@pxref{SECTIONS}).
2301
2302 @kindex --warn-shared-textrel
2303 @item --warn-shared-textrel
2304 Warn if the linker adds a DT_TEXTREL to a shared object.
2305
2306 @kindex --warn-alternate-em
2307 @item --warn-alternate-em
2308 Warn if an object has alternate ELF machine code.
2309
2310 @kindex --warn-unresolved-symbols
2311 @item --warn-unresolved-symbols
2312 If the linker is going to report an unresolved symbol (see the option
2313 @option{--unresolved-symbols}) it will normally generate an error.
2314 This option makes it generate a warning instead.
2315
2316 @kindex --error-unresolved-symbols
2317 @item --error-unresolved-symbols
2318 This restores the linker's default behaviour of generating errors when
2319 it is reporting unresolved symbols.
2320
2321 @kindex --whole-archive
2322 @cindex including an entire archive
2323 @item --whole-archive
2324 For each archive mentioned on the command line after the
2325 @option{--whole-archive} option, include every object file in the archive
2326 in the link, rather than searching the archive for the required object
2327 files. This is normally used to turn an archive file into a shared
2328 library, forcing every object to be included in the resulting shared
2329 library. This option may be used more than once.
2330
2331 Two notes when using this option from gcc: First, gcc doesn't know
2332 about this option, so you have to use @option{-Wl,-whole-archive}.
2333 Second, don't forget to use @option{-Wl,-no-whole-archive} after your
2334 list of archives, because gcc will add its own list of archives to
2335 your link and you may not want this flag to affect those as well.
2336
2337 @kindex --wrap=@var{symbol}
2338 @item --wrap=@var{symbol}
2339 Use a wrapper function for @var{symbol}. Any undefined reference to
2340 @var{symbol} will be resolved to @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. Any
2341 undefined reference to @code{__real_@var{symbol}} will be resolved to
2342 @var{symbol}.
2343
2344 This can be used to provide a wrapper for a system function. The
2345 wrapper function should be called @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. If it
2346 wishes to call the system function, it should call
2347 @code{__real_@var{symbol}}.
2348
2349 Here is a trivial example:
2350
2351 @smallexample
2352 void *
2353 __wrap_malloc (size_t c)
2354 @{
2355 printf ("malloc called with %zu\n", c);
2356 return __real_malloc (c);
2357 @}
2358 @end smallexample
2359
2360 If you link other code with this file using @option{--wrap malloc}, then
2361 all calls to @code{malloc} will call the function @code{__wrap_malloc}
2362 instead. The call to @code{__real_malloc} in @code{__wrap_malloc} will
2363 call the real @code{malloc} function.
2364
2365 You may wish to provide a @code{__real_malloc} function as well, so that
2366 links without the @option{--wrap} option will succeed. If you do this,
2367 you should not put the definition of @code{__real_malloc} in the same
2368 file as @code{__wrap_malloc}; if you do, the assembler may resolve the
2369 call before the linker has a chance to wrap it to @code{malloc}.
2370
2371 @kindex --eh-frame-hdr
2372 @kindex --no-eh-frame-hdr
2373 @item --eh-frame-hdr
2374 @itemx --no-eh-frame-hdr
2375 Request (@option{--eh-frame-hdr}) or suppress
2376 (@option{--no-eh-frame-hdr}) the creation of @code{.eh_frame_hdr}
2377 section and ELF @code{PT_GNU_EH_FRAME} segment header.
2378
2379 @kindex --ld-generated-unwind-info
2380 @item --no-ld-generated-unwind-info
2381 Request creation of @code{.eh_frame} unwind info for linker
2382 generated code sections like PLT. This option is on by default
2383 if linker generated unwind info is supported.
2384
2385 @kindex --enable-new-dtags
2386 @kindex --disable-new-dtags
2387 @item --enable-new-dtags
2388 @itemx --disable-new-dtags
2389 This linker can create the new dynamic tags in ELF. But the older ELF
2390 systems may not understand them. If you specify
2391 @option{--enable-new-dtags}, the new dynamic tags will be created as needed
2392 and older dynamic tags will be omitted.
2393 If you specify @option{--disable-new-dtags}, no new dynamic tags will be
2394 created. By default, the new dynamic tags are not created. Note that
2395 those options are only available for ELF systems.
2396
2397 @kindex --hash-size=@var{number}
2398 @item --hash-size=@var{number}
2399 Set the default size of the linker's hash tables to a prime number
2400 close to @var{number}. Increasing this value can reduce the length of
2401 time it takes the linker to perform its tasks, at the expense of
2402 increasing the linker's memory requirements. Similarly reducing this
2403 value can reduce the memory requirements at the expense of speed.
2404
2405 @kindex --hash-style=@var{style}
2406 @item --hash-style=@var{style}
2407 Set the type of linker's hash table(s). @var{style} can be either
2408 @code{sysv} for classic ELF @code{.hash} section, @code{gnu} for
2409 new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash} section or @code{both} for both
2410 the classic ELF @code{.hash} and new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash}
2411 hash tables. The default depends upon how the linker was configured,
2412 but for most Linux based systems it will be @code{both}.
2413
2414 @kindex --compress-debug-sections=none
2415 @kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib
2416 @kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu
2417 @kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi
2418 @item --compress-debug-sections=none
2419 @itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib
2420 @itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu
2421 @itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi
2422 On ELF platforms, these options control how DWARF debug sections are
2423 compressed using zlib.
2424
2425 @option{--compress-debug-sections=none} doesn't compress DWARF debug
2426 sections. @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu} compresses
2427 DWARF debug sections and renames them to begin with @samp{.zdebug}
2428 instead of @samp{.debug}. @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi}
2429 also compresses DWARF debug sections, but rather than renaming them it
2430 sets the SHF_COMPRESSED flag in the sections' headers.
2431
2432 The @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib} option is an alias for
2433 @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi}.
2434
2435 Note that this option overrides any compression in input debug
2436 sections, so if a binary is linked with @option{--compress-debug-sections=none}
2437 for example, then any compressed debug sections in input files will be
2438 uncompressed before they are copied into the output binary.
2439
2440 The default compression behaviour varies depending upon the target
2441 involved and the configure options used to build the toolchain. The
2442 default can be determined by examining the output from the linker's
2443 @option{--help} option.
2444
2445 @kindex --reduce-memory-overheads
2446 @item --reduce-memory-overheads
2447 This option reduces memory requirements at ld runtime, at the expense of
2448 linking speed. This was introduced to select the old O(n^2) algorithm
2449 for link map file generation, rather than the new O(n) algorithm which uses
2450 about 40% more memory for symbol storage.
2451
2452 Another effect of the switch is to set the default hash table size to
2453 1021, which again saves memory at the cost of lengthening the linker's
2454 run time. This is not done however if the @option{--hash-size} switch
2455 has been used.
2456
2457 The @option{--reduce-memory-overheads} switch may be also be used to
2458 enable other tradeoffs in future versions of the linker.
2459
2460 @kindex --build-id
2461 @kindex --build-id=@var{style}
2462 @item --build-id
2463 @itemx --build-id=@var{style}
2464 Request the creation of a @code{.note.gnu.build-id} ELF note section
2465 or a @code{.buildid} COFF section. The contents of the note are
2466 unique bits identifying this linked file. @var{style} can be
2467 @code{uuid} to use 128 random bits, @code{sha1} to use a 160-bit
2468 @sc{SHA1} hash on the normative parts of the output contents,
2469 @code{md5} to use a 128-bit @sc{MD5} hash on the normative parts of
2470 the output contents, or @code{0x@var{hexstring}} to use a chosen bit
2471 string specified as an even number of hexadecimal digits (@code{-} and
2472 @code{:} characters between digit pairs are ignored). If @var{style}
2473 is omitted, @code{sha1} is used.
2474
2475 The @code{md5} and @code{sha1} styles produces an identifier
2476 that is always the same in an identical output file, but will be
2477 unique among all nonidentical output files. It is not intended
2478 to be compared as a checksum for the file's contents. A linked
2479 file may be changed later by other tools, but the build ID bit
2480 string identifying the original linked file does not change.
2481
2482 Passing @code{none} for @var{style} disables the setting from any
2483 @code{--build-id} options earlier on the command line.
2484 @end table
2485
2486 @c man end
2487
2488 @subsection Options Specific to i386 PE Targets
2489
2490 @c man begin OPTIONS
2491
2492 The i386 PE linker supports the @option{-shared} option, which causes
2493 the output to be a dynamically linked library (DLL) instead of a
2494 normal executable. You should name the output @code{*.dll} when you
2495 use this option. In addition, the linker fully supports the standard
2496 @code{*.def} files, which may be specified on the linker command line
2497 like an object file (in fact, it should precede archives it exports
2498 symbols from, to ensure that they get linked in, just like a normal
2499 object file).
2500
2501 In addition to the options common to all targets, the i386 PE linker
2502 support additional command-line options that are specific to the i386
2503 PE target. Options that take values may be separated from their
2504 values by either a space or an equals sign.
2505
2506 @table @gcctabopt
2507
2508 @kindex --add-stdcall-alias
2509 @item --add-stdcall-alias
2510 If given, symbols with a stdcall suffix (@@@var{nn}) will be exported
2511 as-is and also with the suffix stripped.
2512 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2513
2514 @kindex --base-file
2515 @item --base-file @var{file}
2516 Use @var{file} as the name of a file in which to save the base
2517 addresses of all the relocations needed for generating DLLs with
2518 @file{dlltool}.
2519 [This is an i386 PE specific option]
2520
2521 @kindex --dll
2522 @item --dll
2523 Create a DLL instead of a regular executable. You may also use
2524 @option{-shared} or specify a @code{LIBRARY} in a given @code{.def}
2525 file.
2526 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2527
2528 @kindex --enable-long-section-names
2529 @kindex --disable-long-section-names
2530 @item --enable-long-section-names
2531 @itemx --disable-long-section-names
2532 The PE variants of the COFF object format add an extension that permits
2533 the use of section names longer than eight characters, the normal limit
2534 for COFF. By default, these names are only allowed in object files, as
2535 fully-linked executable images do not carry the COFF string table required
2536 to support the longer names. As a GNU extension, it is possible to
2537 allow their use in executable images as well, or to (probably pointlessly!)
2538 disallow it in object files, by using these two options. Executable images
2539 generated with these long section names are slightly non-standard, carrying
2540 as they do a string table, and may generate confusing output when examined
2541 with non-GNU PE-aware tools, such as file viewers and dumpers. However,
2542 GDB relies on the use of PE long section names to find Dwarf-2 debug
2543 information sections in an executable image at runtime, and so if neither
2544 option is specified on the command-line, @command{ld} will enable long
2545 section names, overriding the default and technically correct behaviour,
2546 when it finds the presence of debug information while linking an executable
2547 image and not stripping symbols.
2548 [This option is valid for all PE targeted ports of the linker]
2549
2550 @kindex --enable-stdcall-fixup
2551 @kindex --disable-stdcall-fixup
2552 @item --enable-stdcall-fixup
2553 @itemx --disable-stdcall-fixup
2554 If the link finds a symbol that it cannot resolve, it will attempt to
2555 do ``fuzzy linking'' by looking for another defined symbol that differs
2556 only in the format of the symbol name (cdecl vs stdcall) and will
2557 resolve that symbol by linking to the match. For example, the
2558 undefined symbol @code{_foo} might be linked to the function
2559 @code{_foo@@12}, or the undefined symbol @code{_bar@@16} might be linked
2560 to the function @code{_bar}. When the linker does this, it prints a
2561 warning, since it normally should have failed to link, but sometimes
2562 import libraries generated from third-party dlls may need this feature
2563 to be usable. If you specify @option{--enable-stdcall-fixup}, this
2564 feature is fully enabled and warnings are not printed. If you specify
2565 @option{--disable-stdcall-fixup}, this feature is disabled and such
2566 mismatches are considered to be errors.
2567 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2568
2569 @kindex --leading-underscore
2570 @kindex --no-leading-underscore
2571 @item --leading-underscore
2572 @itemx --no-leading-underscore
2573 For most targets default symbol-prefix is an underscore and is defined
2574 in target's description. By this option it is possible to
2575 disable/enable the default underscore symbol-prefix.
2576
2577 @cindex DLLs, creating
2578 @kindex --export-all-symbols
2579 @item --export-all-symbols
2580 If given, all global symbols in the objects used to build a DLL will
2581 be exported by the DLL. Note that this is the default if there
2582 otherwise wouldn't be any exported symbols. When symbols are
2583 explicitly exported via DEF files or implicitly exported via function
2584 attributes, the default is to not export anything else unless this
2585 option is given. Note that the symbols @code{DllMain@@12},
2586 @code{DllEntryPoint@@0}, @code{DllMainCRTStartup@@12}, and
2587 @code{impure_ptr} will not be automatically
2588 exported. Also, symbols imported from other DLLs will not be
2589 re-exported, nor will symbols specifying the DLL's internal layout
2590 such as those beginning with @code{_head_} or ending with
2591 @code{_iname}. In addition, no symbols from @code{libgcc},
2592 @code{libstd++}, @code{libmingw32}, or @code{crtX.o} will be exported.
2593 Symbols whose names begin with @code{__rtti_} or @code{__builtin_} will
2594 not be exported, to help with C++ DLLs. Finally, there is an
2595 extensive list of cygwin-private symbols that are not exported
2596 (obviously, this applies on when building DLLs for cygwin targets).
2597 These cygwin-excludes are: @code{_cygwin_dll_entry@@12},
2598 @code{_cygwin_crt0_common@@8}, @code{_cygwin_noncygwin_dll_entry@@12},
2599 @code{_fmode}, @code{_impure_ptr}, @code{cygwin_attach_dll},
2600 @code{cygwin_premain0}, @code{cygwin_premain1}, @code{cygwin_premain2},
2601 @code{cygwin_premain3}, and @code{environ}.
2602 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2603
2604 @kindex --exclude-symbols
2605 @item --exclude-symbols @var{symbol},@var{symbol},...
2606 Specifies a list of symbols which should not be automatically
2607 exported. The symbol names may be delimited by commas or colons.
2608 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2609
2610 @kindex --exclude-all-symbols
2611 @item --exclude-all-symbols
2612 Specifies no symbols should be automatically exported.
2613 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2614
2615 @kindex --file-alignment
2616 @item --file-alignment
2617 Specify the file alignment. Sections in the file will always begin at
2618 file offsets which are multiples of this number. This defaults to
2619 512.
2620 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2621
2622 @cindex heap size
2623 @kindex --heap
2624 @item --heap @var{reserve}
2625 @itemx --heap @var{reserve},@var{commit}
2626 Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
2627 to be used as heap for this program. The default is 1MB reserved, 4K
2628 committed.
2629 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2630
2631 @cindex image base
2632 @kindex --image-base
2633 @item --image-base @var{value}
2634 Use @var{value} as the base address of your program or dll. This is
2635 the lowest memory location that will be used when your program or dll
2636 is loaded. To reduce the need to relocate and improve performance of
2637 your dlls, each should have a unique base address and not overlap any
2638 other dlls. The default is 0x400000 for executables, and 0x10000000
2639 for dlls.
2640 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2641
2642 @kindex --kill-at
2643 @item --kill-at
2644 If given, the stdcall suffixes (@@@var{nn}) will be stripped from
2645 symbols before they are exported.
2646 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2647
2648 @kindex --large-address-aware
2649 @item --large-address-aware
2650 If given, the appropriate bit in the ``Characteristics'' field of the COFF
2651 header is set to indicate that this executable supports virtual addresses
2652 greater than 2 gigabytes. This should be used in conjunction with the /3GB
2653 or /USERVA=@var{value} megabytes switch in the ``[operating systems]''
2654 section of the BOOT.INI. Otherwise, this bit has no effect.
2655 [This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2656
2657 @kindex --disable-large-address-aware
2658 @item --disable-large-address-aware
2659 Reverts the effect of a previous @samp{--large-address-aware} option.
2660 This is useful if @samp{--large-address-aware} is always set by the compiler
2661 driver (e.g. Cygwin gcc) and the executable does not support virtual
2662 addresses greater than 2 gigabytes.
2663 [This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2664
2665 @kindex --major-image-version
2666 @item --major-image-version @var{value}
2667 Sets the major number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 1.
2668 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2669
2670 @kindex --major-os-version
2671 @item --major-os-version @var{value}
2672 Sets the major number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 4.
2673 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2674
2675 @kindex --major-subsystem-version
2676 @item --major-subsystem-version @var{value}
2677 Sets the major number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 4.
2678 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2679
2680 @kindex --minor-image-version
2681 @item --minor-image-version @var{value}
2682 Sets the minor number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 0.
2683 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2684
2685 @kindex --minor-os-version
2686 @item --minor-os-version @var{value}
2687 Sets the minor number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 0.
2688 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2689
2690 @kindex --minor-subsystem-version
2691 @item --minor-subsystem-version @var{value}
2692 Sets the minor number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 0.
2693 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2694
2695 @cindex DEF files, creating
2696 @cindex DLLs, creating
2697 @kindex --output-def
2698 @item --output-def @var{file}
2699 The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain a DEF
2700 file corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This DEF file
2701 (which should be called @code{*.def}) may be used to create an import
2702 library with @code{dlltool} or may be used as a reference to
2703 automatically or implicitly exported symbols.
2704 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2705
2706 @cindex DLLs, creating
2707 @kindex --enable-auto-image-base
2708 @item --enable-auto-image-base
2709 @itemx --enable-auto-image-base=@var{value}
2710 Automatically choose the image base for DLLs, optionally starting with base
2711 @var{value}, unless one is specified using the @code{--image-base} argument.
2712 By using a hash generated from the dllname to create unique image bases
2713 for each DLL, in-memory collisions and relocations which can delay program
2714 execution are avoided.
2715 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2716
2717 @kindex --disable-auto-image-base
2718 @item --disable-auto-image-base
2719 Do not automatically generate a unique image base. If there is no
2720 user-specified image base (@code{--image-base}) then use the platform
2721 default.
2722 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2723
2724 @cindex DLLs, linking to
2725 @kindex --dll-search-prefix
2726 @item --dll-search-prefix @var{string}
2727 When linking dynamically to a dll without an import library,
2728 search for @code{<string><basename>.dll} in preference to
2729 @code{lib<basename>.dll}. This behaviour allows easy distinction
2730 between DLLs built for the various "subplatforms": native, cygwin,
2731 uwin, pw, etc. For instance, cygwin DLLs typically use
2732 @code{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}.
2733 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2734
2735 @kindex --enable-auto-import
2736 @item --enable-auto-import
2737 Do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to @code{__imp__symbol} for
2738 DATA imports from DLLs, thus making it possible to bypass the dllimport
2739 mechanism on the user side and to reference unmangled symbol names.
2740 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2741
2742 The following remarks pertain to the original implementation of the
2743 feature and are obsolete nowadays for Cygwin and MinGW targets.
2744
2745 Note: Use of the 'auto-import' extension will cause the text section
2746 of the image file to be made writable. This does not conform to the
2747 PE-COFF format specification published by Microsoft.
2748
2749 Note - use of the 'auto-import' extension will also cause read only
2750 data which would normally be placed into the .rdata section to be
2751 placed into the .data section instead. This is in order to work
2752 around a problem with consts that is described here:
2753 http://www.cygwin.com/ml/cygwin/2004-09/msg01101.html
2754
2755 Using 'auto-import' generally will 'just work' -- but sometimes you may
2756 see this message:
2757
2758 "variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
2759 documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
2760
2761 This message occurs when some (sub)expression accesses an address
2762 ultimately given by the sum of two constants (Win32 import tables only
2763 allow one). Instances where this may occur include accesses to member
2764 fields of struct variables imported from a DLL, as well as using a
2765 constant index into an array variable imported from a DLL. Any
2766 multiword variable (arrays, structs, long long, etc) may trigger
2767 this error condition. However, regardless of the exact data type
2768 of the offending exported variable, ld will always detect it, issue
2769 the warning, and exit.
2770
2771 There are several ways to address this difficulty, regardless of the
2772 data type of the exported variable:
2773
2774 One way is to use --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc switch. This leaves the task
2775 of adjusting references in your client code for runtime environment, so
2776 this method works only when runtime environment supports this feature.
2777
2778 A second solution is to force one of the 'constants' to be a variable --
2779 that is, unknown and un-optimizable at compile time. For arrays,
2780 there are two possibilities: a) make the indexee (the array's address)
2781 a variable, or b) make the 'constant' index a variable. Thus:
2782
2783 @example
2784 extern type extern_array[];
2785 extern_array[1] -->
2786 @{ volatile type *t=extern_array; t[1] @}
2787 @end example
2788
2789 or
2790
2791 @example
2792 extern type extern_array[];
2793 extern_array[1] -->
2794 @{ volatile int t=1; extern_array[t] @}
2795 @end example
2796
2797 For structs (and most other multiword data types) the only option
2798 is to make the struct itself (or the long long, or the ...) variable:
2799
2800 @example
2801 extern struct s extern_struct;
2802 extern_struct.field -->
2803 @{ volatile struct s *t=&extern_struct; t->field @}
2804 @end example
2805
2806 or
2807
2808 @example
2809 extern long long extern_ll;
2810 extern_ll -->
2811 @{ volatile long long * local_ll=&extern_ll; *local_ll @}
2812 @end example
2813
2814 A third method of dealing with this difficulty is to abandon
2815 'auto-import' for the offending symbol and mark it with
2816 @code{__declspec(dllimport)}. However, in practice that
2817 requires using compile-time #defines to indicate whether you are
2818 building a DLL, building client code that will link to the DLL, or
2819 merely building/linking to a static library. In making the choice
2820 between the various methods of resolving the 'direct address with
2821 constant offset' problem, you should consider typical real-world usage:
2822
2823 Original:
2824 @example
2825 --foo.h
2826 extern int arr[];
2827 --foo.c
2828 #include "foo.h"
2829 void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2830 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2831 @}
2832 @end example
2833
2834 Solution 1:
2835 @example
2836 --foo.h
2837 extern int arr[];
2838 --foo.c
2839 #include "foo.h"
2840 void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2841 /* This workaround is for win32 and cygwin; do not "optimize" */
2842 volatile int *parr = arr;
2843 printf("%d\n",parr[1]);
2844 @}
2845 @end example
2846
2847 Solution 2:
2848 @example
2849 --foo.h
2850 /* Note: auto-export is assumed (no __declspec(dllexport)) */
2851 #if (defined(_WIN32) || defined(__CYGWIN__)) && \
2852 !(defined(FOO_BUILD_DLL) || defined(FOO_STATIC))
2853 #define FOO_IMPORT __declspec(dllimport)
2854 #else
2855 #define FOO_IMPORT
2856 #endif
2857 extern FOO_IMPORT int arr[];
2858 --foo.c
2859 #include "foo.h"
2860 void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2861 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2862 @}
2863 @end example
2864
2865 A fourth way to avoid this problem is to re-code your
2866 library to use a functional interface rather than a data interface
2867 for the offending variables (e.g. set_foo() and get_foo() accessor
2868 functions).
2869
2870 @kindex --disable-auto-import
2871 @item --disable-auto-import
2872 Do not attempt to do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to
2873 @code{__imp__symbol} for DATA imports from DLLs.
2874 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2875
2876 @kindex --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2877 @item --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2878 If your code contains expressions described in --enable-auto-import section,
2879 that is, DATA imports from DLL with non-zero offset, this switch will create
2880 a vector of 'runtime pseudo relocations' which can be used by runtime
2881 environment to adjust references to such data in your client code.
2882 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2883
2884 @kindex --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2885 @item --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2886 Do not create pseudo relocations for non-zero offset DATA imports from DLLs.
2887 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2888
2889 @kindex --enable-extra-pe-debug
2890 @item --enable-extra-pe-debug
2891 Show additional debug info related to auto-import symbol thunking.
2892 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2893
2894 @kindex --section-alignment
2895 @item --section-alignment
2896 Sets the section alignment. Sections in memory will always begin at
2897 addresses which are a multiple of this number. Defaults to 0x1000.
2898 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2899
2900 @cindex stack size
2901 @kindex --stack
2902 @item --stack @var{reserve}
2903 @itemx --stack @var{reserve},@var{commit}
2904 Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
2905 to be used as stack for this program. The default is 2MB reserved, 4K
2906 committed.
2907 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2908
2909 @kindex --subsystem
2910 @item --subsystem @var{which}
2911 @itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}
2912 @itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}.@var{minor}
2913 Specifies the subsystem under which your program will execute. The
2914 legal values for @var{which} are @code{native}, @code{windows},
2915 @code{console}, @code{posix}, and @code{xbox}. You may optionally set
2916 the subsystem version also. Numeric values are also accepted for
2917 @var{which}.
2918 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2919
2920 The following options set flags in the @code{DllCharacteristics} field
2921 of the PE file header:
2922 [These options are specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2923
2924 @kindex --high-entropy-va
2925 @item --high-entropy-va
2926 Image is compatible with 64-bit address space layout randomization
2927 (ASLR).
2928
2929 @kindex --dynamicbase
2930 @item --dynamicbase
2931 The image base address may be relocated using address space layout
2932 randomization (ASLR). This feature was introduced with MS Windows
2933 Vista for i386 PE targets.
2934
2935 @kindex --forceinteg
2936 @item --forceinteg
2937 Code integrity checks are enforced.
2938
2939 @kindex --nxcompat
2940 @item --nxcompat
2941 The image is compatible with the Data Execution Prevention.
2942 This feature was introduced with MS Windows XP SP2 for i386 PE targets.
2943
2944 @kindex --no-isolation
2945 @item --no-isolation
2946 Although the image understands isolation, do not isolate the image.
2947
2948 @kindex --no-seh
2949 @item --no-seh
2950 The image does not use SEH. No SE handler may be called from
2951 this image.
2952
2953 @kindex --no-bind
2954 @item --no-bind
2955 Do not bind this image.
2956
2957 @kindex --wdmdriver
2958 @item --wdmdriver
2959 The driver uses the MS Windows Driver Model.
2960
2961 @kindex --tsaware
2962 @item --tsaware
2963 The image is Terminal Server aware.
2964
2965 @kindex --insert-timestamp
2966 @item --insert-timestamp
2967 @itemx --no-insert-timestamp
2968 Insert a real timestamp into the image. This is the default behaviour
2969 as it matches legacy code and it means that the image will work with
2970 other, proprietary tools. The problem with this default is that it
2971 will result in slightly different images being produced each time the
2972 same sources are linked. The option @option{--no-insert-timestamp}
2973 can be used to insert a zero value for the timestamp, this ensuring
2974 that binaries produced from identical sources will compare
2975 identically.
2976 @end table
2977
2978 @c man end
2979
2980 @ifset C6X
2981 @subsection Options specific to C6X uClinux targets
2982
2983 @c man begin OPTIONS
2984
2985 The C6X uClinux target uses a binary format called DSBT to support shared
2986 libraries. Each shared library in the system needs to have a unique index;
2987 all executables use an index of 0.
2988
2989 @table @gcctabopt
2990
2991 @kindex --dsbt-size
2992 @item --dsbt-size @var{size}
2993 This option sets the number of entries in the DSBT of the current executable
2994 or shared library to @var{size}. The default is to create a table with 64
2995 entries.
2996
2997 @kindex --dsbt-index
2998 @item --dsbt-index @var{index}
2999 This option sets the DSBT index of the current executable or shared library
3000 to @var{index}. The default is 0, which is appropriate for generating
3001 executables. If a shared library is generated with a DSBT index of 0, the
3002 @code{R_C6000_DSBT_INDEX} relocs are copied into the output file.
3003
3004 @kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
3005 The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent
3006 exidx entries in frame unwind info.
3007
3008 @end table
3009
3010 @c man end
3011 @end ifset
3012
3013 @ifset CSKY
3014 @subsection Options specific to C-SKY targets
3015
3016 @c man begin OPTIONS
3017
3018 @table @gcctabopt
3019
3020 @kindex --branch-stub on C-SKY
3021 @item --branch-stub
3022 This option enables linker branch relaxation by inserting branch stub
3023 sections when needed to extend the range of branches. This option is
3024 usually not required since C-SKY supports branch and call instructions that
3025 can access the full memory range and branch relaxation is normally handled by
3026 the compiler or assembler.
3027
3028 @kindex --stub-group-size on C-SKY
3029 @item --stub-group-size=@var{N}
3030 This option allows finer control of linker branch stub creation.
3031 It sets the maximum size of a group of input sections that can
3032 be handled by one stub section. A negative value of @var{N} locates
3033 stub sections after their branches, while a positive value allows stub
3034 sections to appear either before or after the branches. Values of
3035 @samp{1} or @samp{-1} indicate that the
3036 linker should choose suitable defaults.
3037
3038 @end table
3039
3040 @c man end
3041 @end ifset
3042
3043 @ifset M68HC11
3044 @subsection Options specific to Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 targets
3045
3046 @c man begin OPTIONS
3047
3048 The 68HC11 and 68HC12 linkers support specific options to control the
3049 memory bank switching mapping and trampoline code generation.
3050
3051 @table @gcctabopt
3052
3053 @kindex --no-trampoline
3054 @item --no-trampoline
3055 This option disables the generation of trampoline. By default a trampoline
3056 is generated for each far function which is called using a @code{jsr}
3057 instruction (this happens when a pointer to a far function is taken).
3058
3059 @kindex --bank-window
3060 @item --bank-window @var{name}
3061 This option indicates to the linker the name of the memory region in
3062 the @samp{MEMORY} specification that describes the memory bank window.
3063 The definition of such region is then used by the linker to compute
3064 paging and addresses within the memory window.
3065
3066 @end table
3067
3068 @c man end
3069 @end ifset
3070
3071 @ifset M68K
3072 @subsection Options specific to Motorola 68K target
3073
3074 @c man begin OPTIONS
3075
3076 The following options are supported to control handling of GOT generation
3077 when linking for 68K targets.
3078
3079 @table @gcctabopt
3080
3081 @kindex --got
3082 @item --got=@var{type}
3083 This option tells the linker which GOT generation scheme to use.
3084 @var{type} should be one of @samp{single}, @samp{negative},
3085 @samp{multigot} or @samp{target}. For more information refer to the
3086 Info entry for @file{ld}.
3087
3088 @end table
3089
3090 @c man end
3091 @end ifset
3092
3093 @ifset MIPS
3094 @subsection Options specific to MIPS targets
3095
3096 @c man begin OPTIONS
3097
3098 The following options are supported to control microMIPS instruction
3099 generation and branch relocation checks for ISA mode transitions when
3100 linking for MIPS targets.
3101
3102 @table @gcctabopt
3103
3104 @kindex --insn32
3105 @item --insn32
3106 @kindex --no-insn32
3107 @itemx --no-insn32
3108 These options control the choice of microMIPS instructions used in code
3109 generated by the linker, such as that in the PLT or lazy binding stubs,
3110 or in relaxation. If @samp{--insn32} is used, then the linker only uses
3111 32-bit instruction encodings. By default or if @samp{--no-insn32} is
3112 used, all instruction encodings are used, including 16-bit ones where
3113 possible.
3114
3115 @kindex --ignore-branch-isa
3116 @item --ignore-branch-isa
3117 @kindex --no-ignore-branch-isa
3118 @itemx --no-ignore-branch-isa
3119 These options control branch relocation checks for invalid ISA mode
3120 transitions. If @samp{--ignore-branch-isa} is used, then the linker
3121 accepts any branch relocations and any ISA mode transition required
3122 is lost in relocation calculation, except for some cases of @code{BAL}
3123 instructions which meet relaxation conditions and are converted to
3124 equivalent @code{JALX} instructions as the associated relocation is
3125 calculated. By default or if @samp{--no-ignore-branch-isa} is used
3126 a check is made causing the loss of an ISA mode transition to produce
3127 an error.
3128
3129 @end table
3130
3131 @c man end
3132 @end ifset
3133
3134 @ifset UsesEnvVars
3135 @node Environment
3136 @section Environment Variables
3137
3138 @c man begin ENVIRONMENT
3139
3140 You can change the behaviour of @command{ld} with the environment variables
3141 @ifclear SingleFormat
3142 @code{GNUTARGET},
3143 @end ifclear
3144 @code{LDEMULATION} and @code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}.
3145
3146 @ifclear SingleFormat
3147 @kindex GNUTARGET
3148 @cindex default input format
3149 @code{GNUTARGET} determines the input-file object format if you don't
3150 use @samp{-b} (or its synonym @samp{--format}). Its value should be one
3151 of the BFD names for an input format (@pxref{BFD}). If there is no
3152 @code{GNUTARGET} in the environment, @command{ld} uses the natural format
3153 of the target. If @code{GNUTARGET} is set to @code{default} then BFD
3154 attempts to discover the input format by examining binary input files;
3155 this method often succeeds, but there are potential ambiguities, since
3156 there is no method of ensuring that the magic number used to specify
3157 object-file formats is unique. However, the configuration procedure for
3158 BFD on each system places the conventional format for that system first
3159 in the search-list, so ambiguities are resolved in favor of convention.
3160 @end ifclear
3161
3162 @kindex LDEMULATION
3163 @cindex default emulation
3164 @cindex emulation, default
3165 @code{LDEMULATION} determines the default emulation if you don't use the
3166 @samp{-m} option. The emulation can affect various aspects of linker
3167 behaviour, particularly the default linker script. You can list the
3168 available emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options. If
3169 the @samp{-m} option is not used, and the @code{LDEMULATION} environment
3170 variable is not defined, the default emulation depends upon how the
3171 linker was configured.
3172
3173 @kindex COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE
3174 @cindex demangling, default
3175 Normally, the linker will default to demangling symbols. However, if
3176 @code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE} is set in the environment, then it will
3177 default to not demangling symbols. This environment variable is used in
3178 a similar fashion by the @code{gcc} linker wrapper program. The default
3179 may be overridden by the @samp{--demangle} and @samp{--no-demangle}
3180 options.
3181
3182 @c man end
3183 @end ifset
3184
3185 @node Scripts
3186 @chapter Linker Scripts
3187
3188 @cindex scripts
3189 @cindex linker scripts
3190 @cindex command files
3191 Every link is controlled by a @dfn{linker script}. This script is
3192 written in the linker command language.
3193
3194 The main purpose of the linker script is to describe how the sections in
3195 the input files should be mapped into the output file, and to control
3196 the memory layout of the output file. Most linker scripts do nothing
3197 more than this. However, when necessary, the linker script can also
3198 direct the linker to perform many other operations, using the commands
3199 described below.
3200
3201 The linker always uses a linker script. If you do not supply one
3202 yourself, the linker will use a default script that is compiled into the
3203 linker executable. You can use the @samp{--verbose} command-line option
3204 to display the default linker script. Certain command-line options,
3205 such as @samp{-r} or @samp{-N}, will affect the default linker script.
3206
3207 You may supply your own linker script by using the @samp{-T} command
3208 line option. When you do this, your linker script will replace the
3209 default linker script.
3210
3211 You may also use linker scripts implicitly by naming them as input files
3212 to the linker, as though they were files to be linked. @xref{Implicit
3213 Linker Scripts}.
3214
3215 @menu
3216 * Basic Script Concepts:: Basic Linker Script Concepts
3217 * Script Format:: Linker Script Format
3218 * Simple Example:: Simple Linker Script Example
3219 * Simple Commands:: Simple Linker Script Commands
3220 * Assignments:: Assigning Values to Symbols
3221 * SECTIONS:: SECTIONS Command
3222 * MEMORY:: MEMORY Command
3223 * PHDRS:: PHDRS Command
3224 * VERSION:: VERSION Command
3225 * Expressions:: Expressions in Linker Scripts
3226 * Implicit Linker Scripts:: Implicit Linker Scripts
3227 @end menu
3228
3229 @node Basic Script Concepts
3230 @section Basic Linker Script Concepts
3231 @cindex linker script concepts
3232 We need to define some basic concepts and vocabulary in order to
3233 describe the linker script language.
3234
3235 The linker combines input files into a single output file. The output
3236 file and each input file are in a special data format known as an
3237 @dfn{object file format}. Each file is called an @dfn{object file}.
3238 The output file is often called an @dfn{executable}, but for our
3239 purposes we will also call it an object file. Each object file has,
3240 among other things, a list of @dfn{sections}. We sometimes refer to a
3241 section in an input file as an @dfn{input section}; similarly, a section
3242 in the output file is an @dfn{output section}.
3243
3244 Each section in an object file has a name and a size. Most sections
3245 also have an associated block of data, known as the @dfn{section
3246 contents}. A section may be marked as @dfn{loadable}, which means that
3247 the contents should be loaded into memory when the output file is run.
3248 A section with no contents may be @dfn{allocatable}, which means that an
3249 area in memory should be set aside, but nothing in particular should be
3250 loaded there (in some cases this memory must be zeroed out). A section
3251 which is neither loadable nor allocatable typically contains some sort
3252 of debugging information.
3253
3254 Every loadable or allocatable output section has two addresses. The
3255 first is the @dfn{VMA}, or virtual memory address. This is the address
3256 the section will have when the output file is run. The second is the
3257 @dfn{LMA}, or load memory address. This is the address at which the
3258 section will be loaded. In most cases the two addresses will be the
3259 same. An example of when they might be different is when a data section
3260 is loaded into ROM, and then copied into RAM when the program starts up
3261 (this technique is often used to initialize global variables in a ROM
3262 based system). In this case the ROM address would be the LMA, and the
3263 RAM address would be the VMA.
3264
3265 You can see the sections in an object file by using the @code{objdump}
3266 program with the @samp{-h} option.
3267
3268 Every object file also has a list of @dfn{symbols}, known as the
3269 @dfn{symbol table}. A symbol may be defined or undefined. Each symbol
3270 has a name, and each defined symbol has an address, among other
3271 information. If you compile a C or C++ program into an object file, you
3272 will get a defined symbol for every defined function and global or
3273 static variable. Every undefined function or global variable which is
3274 referenced in the input file will become an undefined symbol.
3275
3276 You can see the symbols in an object file by using the @code{nm}
3277 program, or by using the @code{objdump} program with the @samp{-t}
3278 option.
3279
3280 @node Script Format
3281 @section Linker Script Format
3282 @cindex linker script format
3283 Linker scripts are text files.
3284
3285 You write a linker script as a series of commands. Each command is
3286 either a keyword, possibly followed by arguments, or an assignment to a
3287 symbol. You may separate commands using semicolons. Whitespace is
3288 generally ignored.
3289
3290 Strings such as file or format names can normally be entered directly.
3291 If the file name contains a character such as a comma which would
3292 otherwise serve to separate file names, you may put the file name in
3293 double quotes. There is no way to use a double quote character in a
3294 file name.
3295
3296 You may include comments in linker scripts just as in C, delimited by
3297 @samp{/*} and @samp{*/}. As in C, comments are syntactically equivalent
3298 to whitespace.
3299
3300 @node Simple Example
3301 @section Simple Linker Script Example
3302 @cindex linker script example
3303 @cindex example of linker script
3304 Many linker scripts are fairly simple.
3305
3306 The simplest possible linker script has just one command:
3307 @samp{SECTIONS}. You use the @samp{SECTIONS} command to describe the
3308 memory layout of the output file.
3309
3310 The @samp{SECTIONS} command is a powerful command. Here we will
3311 describe a simple use of it. Let's assume your program consists only of
3312 code, initialized data, and uninitialized data. These will be in the
3313 @samp{.text}, @samp{.data}, and @samp{.bss} sections, respectively.
3314 Let's assume further that these are the only sections which appear in
3315 your input files.
3316
3317 For this example, let's say that the code should be loaded at address
3318 0x10000, and that the data should start at address 0x8000000. Here is a
3319 linker script which will do that:
3320 @smallexample
3321 SECTIONS
3322 @{
3323 . = 0x10000;
3324 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
3325 . = 0x8000000;
3326 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3327 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
3328 @}
3329 @end smallexample
3330
3331 You write the @samp{SECTIONS} command as the keyword @samp{SECTIONS},
3332 followed by a series of symbol assignments and output section
3333 descriptions enclosed in curly braces.
3334
3335 The first line inside the @samp{SECTIONS} command of the above example
3336 sets the value of the special symbol @samp{.}, which is the location
3337 counter. If you do not specify the address of an output section in some
3338 other way (other ways are described later), the address is set from the
3339 current value of the location counter. The location counter is then
3340 incremented by the size of the output section. At the start of the
3341 @samp{SECTIONS} command, the location counter has the value @samp{0}.
3342
3343 The second line defines an output section, @samp{.text}. The colon is
3344 required syntax which may be ignored for now. Within the curly braces
3345 after the output section name, you list the names of the input sections
3346 which should be placed into this output section. The @samp{*} is a
3347 wildcard which matches any file name. The expression @samp{*(.text)}
3348 means all @samp{.text} input sections in all input files.
3349
3350 Since the location counter is @samp{0x10000} when the output section
3351 @samp{.text} is defined, the linker will set the address of the
3352 @samp{.text} section in the output file to be @samp{0x10000}.
3353
3354 The remaining lines define the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss} sections in
3355 the output file. The linker will place the @samp{.data} output section
3356 at address @samp{0x8000000}. After the linker places the @samp{.data}
3357 output section, the value of the location counter will be
3358 @samp{0x8000000} plus the size of the @samp{.data} output section. The
3359 effect is that the linker will place the @samp{.bss} output section
3360 immediately after the @samp{.data} output section in memory.
3361
3362 The linker will ensure that each output section has the required
3363 alignment, by increasing the location counter if necessary. In this
3364 example, the specified addresses for the @samp{.text} and @samp{.data}
3365 sections will probably satisfy any alignment constraints, but the linker
3366 may have to create a small gap between the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss}
3367 sections.
3368
3369 That's it! That's a simple and complete linker script.
3370
3371 @node Simple Commands
3372 @section Simple Linker Script Commands
3373 @cindex linker script simple commands
3374 In this section we describe the simple linker script commands.
3375
3376 @menu
3377 * Entry Point:: Setting the entry point
3378 * File Commands:: Commands dealing with files
3379 @ifclear SingleFormat
3380 * Format Commands:: Commands dealing with object file formats
3381 @end ifclear
3382
3383 * REGION_ALIAS:: Assign alias names to memory regions
3384 * Miscellaneous Commands:: Other linker script commands
3385 @end menu
3386
3387 @node Entry Point
3388 @subsection Setting the Entry Point
3389 @kindex ENTRY(@var{symbol})
3390 @cindex start of execution
3391 @cindex first instruction
3392 @cindex entry point
3393 The first instruction to execute in a program is called the @dfn{entry
3394 point}. You can use the @code{ENTRY} linker script command to set the
3395 entry point. The argument is a symbol name:
3396 @smallexample
3397 ENTRY(@var{symbol})
3398 @end smallexample
3399
3400 There are several ways to set the entry point. The linker will set the
3401 entry point by trying each of the following methods in order, and
3402 stopping when one of them succeeds:
3403 @itemize @bullet
3404 @item
3405 the @samp{-e} @var{entry} command-line option;
3406 @item
3407 the @code{ENTRY(@var{symbol})} command in a linker script;
3408 @item
3409 the value of a target specific symbol, if it is defined; For many
3410 targets this is @code{start}, but PE and BeOS based systems for example
3411 check a list of possible entry symbols, matching the first one found.
3412 @item
3413 the address of the first byte of the @samp{.text} section, if present;
3414 @item
3415 The address @code{0}.
3416 @end itemize
3417
3418 @node File Commands
3419 @subsection Commands Dealing with Files
3420 @cindex linker script file commands
3421 Several linker script commands deal with files.
3422
3423 @table @code
3424 @item INCLUDE @var{filename}
3425 @kindex INCLUDE @var{filename}
3426 @cindex including a linker script
3427 Include the linker script @var{filename} at this point. The file will
3428 be searched for in the current directory, and in any directory specified
3429 with the @option{-L} option. You can nest calls to @code{INCLUDE} up to
3430 10 levels deep.
3431
3432 You can place @code{INCLUDE} directives at the top level, in @code{MEMORY} or
3433 @code{SECTIONS} commands, or in output section descriptions.
3434
3435 @item INPUT(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3436 @itemx INPUT(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3437 @kindex INPUT(@var{files})
3438 @cindex input files in linker scripts
3439 @cindex input object files in linker scripts
3440 @cindex linker script input object files
3441 The @code{INPUT} command directs the linker to include the named files
3442 in the link, as though they were named on the command line.
3443
3444 For example, if you always want to include @file{subr.o} any time you do
3445 a link, but you can't be bothered to put it on every link command line,
3446 then you can put @samp{INPUT (subr.o)} in your linker script.
3447
3448 In fact, if you like, you can list all of your input files in the linker
3449 script, and then invoke the linker with nothing but a @samp{-T} option.
3450
3451 In case a @dfn{sysroot prefix} is configured, and the filename starts
3452 with the @samp{/} character, and the script being processed was
3453 located inside the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, the filename will be looked
3454 for in the @dfn{sysroot prefix}. Otherwise, the linker will try to
3455 open the file in the current directory. If it is not found, the
3456 linker will search through the archive library search path.
3457 The @dfn{sysroot prefix} can also be forced by specifying @code{=}
3458 as the first character in the filename path, or prefixing the filename
3459 path with @code{$SYSROOT}. See also the description of @samp{-L} in
3460 @ref{Options,,Command-line Options}.
3461
3462 If you use @samp{INPUT (-l@var{file})}, @command{ld} will transform the
3463 name to @code{lib@var{file}.a}, as with the command-line argument
3464 @samp{-l}.
3465
3466 When you use the @code{INPUT} command in an implicit linker script, the
3467 files will be included in the link at the point at which the linker
3468 script file is included. This can affect archive searching.
3469
3470 @item GROUP(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3471 @itemx GROUP(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3472 @kindex GROUP(@var{files})
3473 @cindex grouping input files
3474 The @code{GROUP} command is like @code{INPUT}, except that the named
3475 files should all be archives, and they are searched repeatedly until no
3476 new undefined references are created. See the description of @samp{-(}
3477 in @ref{Options,,Command-line Options}.
3478
3479 @item AS_NEEDED(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3480 @itemx AS_NEEDED(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3481 @kindex AS_NEEDED(@var{files})
3482 This construct can appear only inside of the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP}
3483 commands, among other filenames. The files listed will be handled
3484 as if they appear directly in the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} commands,
3485 with the exception of ELF shared libraries, that will be added only
3486 when they are actually needed. This construct essentially enables
3487 @option{--as-needed} option for all the files listed inside of it
3488 and restores previous @option{--as-needed} resp. @option{--no-as-needed}
3489 setting afterwards.
3490
3491 @item OUTPUT(@var{filename})
3492 @kindex OUTPUT(@var{filename})
3493 @cindex output file name in linker script
3494 The @code{OUTPUT} command names the output file. Using
3495 @code{OUTPUT(@var{filename})} in the linker script is exactly like using
3496 @samp{-o @var{filename}} on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command
3497 Line Options}). If both are used, the command-line option takes
3498 precedence.
3499
3500 You can use the @code{OUTPUT} command to define a default name for the
3501 output file other than the usual default of @file{a.out}.
3502
3503 @item SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3504 @kindex SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3505 @cindex library search path in linker script
3506 @cindex archive search path in linker script
3507 @cindex search path in linker script
3508 The @code{SEARCH_DIR} command adds @var{path} to the list of paths where
3509 @command{ld} looks for archive libraries. Using
3510 @code{SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})} is exactly like using @samp{-L @var{path}}
3511 on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command-line Options}). If both
3512 are used, then the linker will search both paths. Paths specified using
3513 the command-line option are searched first.
3514
3515 @item STARTUP(@var{filename})
3516 @kindex STARTUP(@var{filename})
3517 @cindex first input file
3518 The @code{STARTUP} command is just like the @code{INPUT} command, except
3519 that @var{filename} will become the first input file to be linked, as
3520 though it were specified first on the command line. This may be useful
3521 when using a system in which the entry point is always the start of the
3522 first file.
3523 @end table
3524
3525 @ifclear SingleFormat
3526 @node Format Commands
3527 @subsection Commands Dealing with Object File Formats
3528 A couple of linker script commands deal with object file formats.
3529
3530 @table @code
3531 @item OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3532 @itemx OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{default}, @var{big}, @var{little})
3533 @kindex OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3534 @cindex output file format in linker script
3535 The @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command names the BFD format to use for the
3536 output file (@pxref{BFD}). Using @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})} is
3537 exactly like using @samp{--oformat @var{bfdname}} on the command line
3538 (@pxref{Options,,Command-line Options}). If both are used, the command
3539 line option takes precedence.
3540
3541 You can use @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} with three arguments to use different
3542 formats based on the @samp{-EB} and @samp{-EL} command-line options.
3543 This permits the linker script to set the output format based on the
3544 desired endianness.
3545
3546 If neither @samp{-EB} nor @samp{-EL} are used, then the output format
3547 will be the first argument, @var{default}. If @samp{-EB} is used, the
3548 output format will be the second argument, @var{big}. If @samp{-EL} is
3549 used, the output format will be the third argument, @var{little}.
3550
3551 For example, the default linker script for the MIPS ELF target uses this
3552 command:
3553 @smallexample
3554 OUTPUT_FORMAT(elf32-bigmips, elf32-bigmips, elf32-littlemips)
3555 @end smallexample
3556 This says that the default format for the output file is
3557 @samp{elf32-bigmips}, but if the user uses the @samp{-EL} command-line
3558 option, the output file will be created in the @samp{elf32-littlemips}
3559 format.
3560
3561 @item TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3562 @kindex TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3563 @cindex input file format in linker script
3564 The @code{TARGET} command names the BFD format to use when reading input
3565 files. It affects subsequent @code{INPUT} and @code{GROUP} commands.
3566 This command is like using @samp{-b @var{bfdname}} on the command line
3567 (@pxref{Options,,Command-line Options}). If the @code{TARGET} command
3568 is used but @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} is not, then the last @code{TARGET}
3569 command is also used to set the format for the output file. @xref{BFD}.
3570 @end table
3571 @end ifclear
3572
3573 @node REGION_ALIAS
3574 @subsection Assign alias names to memory regions
3575 @kindex REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3576 @cindex region alias
3577 @cindex region names
3578
3579 Alias names can be added to existing memory regions created with the
3580 @ref{MEMORY} command. Each name corresponds to at most one memory region.
3581
3582 @smallexample
3583 REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3584 @end smallexample
3585
3586 The @code{REGION_ALIAS} function creates an alias name @var{alias} for the
3587 memory region @var{region}. This allows a flexible mapping of output sections
3588 to memory regions. An example follows.
3589
3590 Suppose we have an application for embedded systems which come with various
3591 memory storage devices. All have a general purpose, volatile memory @code{RAM}
3592 that allows code execution or data storage. Some may have a read-only,
3593 non-volatile memory @code{ROM} that allows code execution and read-only data
3594 access. The last variant is a read-only, non-volatile memory @code{ROM2} with
3595 read-only data access and no code execution capability. We have four output
3596 sections:
3597
3598 @itemize @bullet
3599 @item
3600 @code{.text} program code;
3601 @item
3602 @code{.rodata} read-only data;
3603 @item
3604 @code{.data} read-write initialized data;
3605 @item
3606 @code{.bss} read-write zero initialized data.
3607 @end itemize
3608
3609 The goal is to provide a linker command file that contains a system independent
3610 part defining the output sections and a system dependent part mapping the
3611 output sections to the memory regions available on the system. Our embedded
3612 systems come with three different memory setups @code{A}, @code{B} and
3613 @code{C}:
3614 @multitable @columnfractions .25 .25 .25 .25
3615 @item Section @tab Variant A @tab Variant B @tab Variant C
3616 @item .text @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM
3617 @item .rodata @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM2
3618 @item .data @tab RAM @tab RAM/ROM @tab RAM/ROM2
3619 @item .bss @tab RAM @tab RAM @tab RAM
3620 @end multitable
3621 The notation @code{RAM/ROM} or @code{RAM/ROM2} means that this section is
3622 loaded into region @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} respectively. Please note that
3623 the load address of the @code{.data} section starts in all three variants at
3624 the end of the @code{.rodata} section.
3625
3626 The base linker script that deals with the output sections follows. It
3627 includes the system dependent @code{linkcmds.memory} file that describes the
3628 memory layout:
3629 @smallexample
3630 INCLUDE linkcmds.memory
3631
3632 SECTIONS
3633 @{
3634 .text :
3635 @{
3636 *(.text)
3637 @} > REGION_TEXT
3638 .rodata :
3639 @{
3640 *(.rodata)
3641 rodata_end = .;
3642 @} > REGION_RODATA
3643 .data : AT (rodata_end)
3644 @{
3645 data_start = .;
3646 *(.data)
3647 @} > REGION_DATA
3648 data_size = SIZEOF(.data);
3649 data_load_start = LOADADDR(.data);
3650 .bss :
3651 @{
3652 *(.bss)
3653 @} > REGION_BSS
3654 @}
3655 @end smallexample
3656
3657 Now we need three different @code{linkcmds.memory} files to define memory
3658 regions and alias names. The content of @code{linkcmds.memory} for the three
3659 variants @code{A}, @code{B} and @code{C}:
3660 @table @code
3661 @item A
3662 Here everything goes into the @code{RAM}.
3663 @smallexample
3664 MEMORY
3665 @{
3666 RAM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 4M
3667 @}
3668
3669 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", RAM);
3670 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", RAM);
3671 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3672 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3673 @end smallexample
3674 @item B
3675 Program code and read-only data go into the @code{ROM}. Read-write data goes
3676 into the @code{RAM}. An image of the initialized data is loaded into the
3677 @code{ROM} and will be copied during system start into the @code{RAM}.
3678 @smallexample
3679 MEMORY
3680 @{
3681 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 3M
3682 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3683 @}
3684
3685 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3686 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM);
3687 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3688 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3689 @end smallexample
3690 @item C
3691 Program code goes into the @code{ROM}. Read-only data goes into the
3692 @code{ROM2}. Read-write data goes into the @code{RAM}. An image of the
3693 initialized data is loaded into the @code{ROM2} and will be copied during
3694 system start into the @code{RAM}.
3695 @smallexample
3696 MEMORY
3697 @{
3698 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 2M
3699 ROM2 : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3700 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x20000000, LENGTH = 1M
3701 @}
3702
3703 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3704 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM2);
3705 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3706 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3707 @end smallexample
3708 @end table
3709
3710 It is possible to write a common system initialization routine to copy the
3711 @code{.data} section from @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} into the @code{RAM} if
3712 necessary:
3713 @smallexample
3714 #include <string.h>
3715
3716 extern char data_start [];
3717 extern char data_size [];
3718 extern char data_load_start [];
3719
3720 void copy_data(void)
3721 @{
3722 if (data_start != data_load_start)
3723 @{
3724 memcpy(data_start, data_load_start, (size_t) data_size);
3725 @}
3726 @}
3727 @end smallexample
3728
3729 @node Miscellaneous Commands
3730 @subsection Other Linker Script Commands
3731 There are a few other linker scripts commands.
3732
3733 @table @code
3734 @item ASSERT(@var{exp}, @var{message})
3735 @kindex ASSERT
3736 @cindex assertion in linker script
3737 Ensure that @var{exp} is non-zero. If it is zero, then exit the linker
3738 with an error code, and print @var{message}.
3739
3740 Note that assertions are checked before the final stages of linking
3741 take place. This means that expressions involving symbols PROVIDEd
3742 inside section definitions will fail if the user has not set values
3743 for those symbols. The only exception to this rule is PROVIDEd
3744 symbols that just reference dot. Thus an assertion like this:
3745
3746 @smallexample
3747 .stack :
3748 @{
3749 PROVIDE (__stack = .);
3750 PROVIDE (__stack_size = 0x100);
3751 ASSERT ((__stack > (_end + __stack_size)), "Error: No room left for the stack");
3752 @}
3753 @end smallexample
3754
3755 will fail if @code{__stack_size} is not defined elsewhere. Symbols
3756 PROVIDEd outside of section definitions are evaluated earlier, so they
3757 can be used inside ASSERTions. Thus:
3758
3759 @smallexample
3760 PROVIDE (__stack_size = 0x100);
3761 .stack :
3762 @{
3763 PROVIDE (__stack = .);
3764 ASSERT ((__stack > (_end + __stack_size)), "Error: No room left for the stack");
3765 @}
3766 @end smallexample
3767
3768 will work.
3769
3770 @item EXTERN(@var{symbol} @var{symbol} @dots{})
3771 @kindex EXTERN
3772 @cindex undefined symbol in linker script
3773 Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
3774 symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
3775 modules from standard libraries. You may list several @var{symbol}s for
3776 each @code{EXTERN}, and you may use @code{EXTERN} multiple times. This
3777 command has the same effect as the @samp{-u} command-line option.
3778
3779 @item FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3780 @kindex FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3781 @cindex common allocation in linker script
3782 This command has the same effect as the @samp{-d} command-line option:
3783 to make @command{ld} assign space to common symbols even if a relocatable
3784 output file is specified (@samp{-r}).
3785
3786 @item INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3787 @kindex INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3788 @cindex common allocation in linker script
3789 This command has the same effect as the @samp{--no-define-common}
3790 command-line option: to make @code{ld} omit the assignment of addresses
3791 to common symbols even for a non-relocatable output file.
3792
3793 @item FORCE_GROUP_ALLOCATION
3794 @kindex FORCE_GROUP_ALLOCATION
3795 @cindex group allocation in linker script
3796 @cindex section groups
3797 @cindex COMDAT
3798 This command has the same effect as the
3799 @samp{--force-group-allocation} command-line option: to make
3800 @command{ld} place section group members like normal input sections,
3801 and to delete the section groups even if a relocatable output file is
3802 specified (@samp{-r}).
3803
3804 @item INSERT [ AFTER | BEFORE ] @var{output_section}
3805 @kindex INSERT
3806 @cindex insert user script into default script
3807 This command is typically used in a script specified by @samp{-T} to
3808 augment the default @code{SECTIONS} with, for example, overlays. It
3809 inserts all prior linker script statements after (or before)
3810 @var{output_section}, and also causes @samp{-T} to not override the
3811 default linker script. The exact insertion point is as for orphan
3812 sections. @xref{Location Counter}. The insertion happens after the
3813 linker has mapped input sections to output sections. Prior to the
3814 insertion, since @samp{-T} scripts are parsed before the default
3815 linker script, statements in the @samp{-T} script occur before the
3816 default linker script statements in the internal linker representation
3817 of the script. In particular, input section assignments will be made
3818 to @samp{-T} output sections before those in the default script. Here
3819 is an example of how a @samp{-T} script using @code{INSERT} might look:
3820
3821 @smallexample
3822 SECTIONS
3823 @{
3824 OVERLAY :
3825 @{
3826 .ov1 @{ ov1*(.text) @}
3827 .ov2 @{ ov2*(.text) @}
3828 @}
3829 @}
3830 INSERT AFTER .text;
3831 @end smallexample
3832
3833 @item NOCROSSREFS(@var{section} @var{section} @dots{})
3834 @kindex NOCROSSREFS(@var{sections})
3835 @cindex cross references
3836 This command may be used to tell @command{ld} to issue an error about any
3837 references among certain output sections.
3838
3839 In certain types of programs, particularly on embedded systems when
3840 using overlays, when one section is loaded into memory, another section
3841 will not be. Any direct references between the two sections would be
3842 errors. For example, it would be an error if code in one section called
3843 a function defined in the other section.
3844
3845 The @code{NOCROSSREFS} command takes a list of output section names. If
3846 @command{ld} detects any cross references between the sections, it reports
3847 an error and returns a non-zero exit status. Note that the
3848 @code{NOCROSSREFS} command uses output section names, not input section
3849 names.
3850
3851 @item NOCROSSREFS_TO(@var{tosection} @var{fromsection} @dots{})
3852 @kindex NOCROSSREFS_TO(@var{tosection} @var{fromsections})
3853 @cindex cross references
3854 This command may be used to tell @command{ld} to issue an error about any
3855 references to one section from a list of other sections.
3856
3857 The @code{NOCROSSREFS} command is useful when ensuring that two or more
3858 output sections are entirely independent but there are situations where
3859 a one-way dependency is needed. For example, in a multi-core application
3860 there may be shared code that can be called from each core but for safety
3861 must never call back.
3862
3863 The @code{NOCROSSREFS_TO} command takes a list of output section names.
3864 The first section can not be referenced from any of the other sections.
3865 If @command{ld} detects any references to the first section from any of
3866 the other sections, it reports an error and returns a non-zero exit
3867 status. Note that the @code{NOCROSSREFS_TO} command uses output section
3868 names, not input section names.
3869
3870 @ifclear SingleFormat
3871 @item OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3872 @kindex OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3873 @cindex machine architecture
3874 @cindex architecture
3875 Specify a particular output machine architecture. The argument is one
3876 of the names used by the BFD library (@pxref{BFD}). You can see the
3877 architecture of an object file by using the @code{objdump} program with
3878 the @samp{-f} option.
3879 @end ifclear
3880
3881 @item LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
3882 @kindex LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
3883 This command may be used to modify @command{ld} behavior. If
3884 @var{string} is @code{"SANE_EXPR"} then absolute symbols and numbers
3885 in a script are simply treated as numbers everywhere.
3886 @xref{Expression Section}.
3887 @end table
3888
3889 @node Assignments
3890 @section Assigning Values to Symbols
3891 @cindex assignment in scripts
3892 @cindex symbol definition, scripts
3893 @cindex variables, defining
3894 You may assign a value to a symbol in a linker script. This will define
3895 the symbol and place it into the symbol table with a global scope.
3896
3897 @menu
3898 * Simple Assignments:: Simple Assignments
3899 * HIDDEN:: HIDDEN
3900 * PROVIDE:: PROVIDE
3901 * PROVIDE_HIDDEN:: PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3902 * Source Code Reference:: How to use a linker script defined symbol in source code
3903 @end menu
3904
3905 @node Simple Assignments
3906 @subsection Simple Assignments
3907
3908 You may assign to a symbol using any of the C assignment operators:
3909
3910 @table @code
3911 @item @var{symbol} = @var{expression} ;
3912 @itemx @var{symbol} += @var{expression} ;
3913 @itemx @var{symbol} -= @var{expression} ;
3914 @itemx @var{symbol} *= @var{expression} ;
3915 @itemx @var{symbol} /= @var{expression} ;
3916 @itemx @var{symbol} <<= @var{expression} ;
3917 @itemx @var{symbol} >>= @var{expression} ;
3918 @itemx @var{symbol} &= @var{expression} ;
3919 @itemx @var{symbol} |= @var{expression} ;
3920 @end table
3921
3922 The first case will define @var{symbol} to the value of
3923 @var{expression}. In the other cases, @var{symbol} must already be
3924 defined, and the value will be adjusted accordingly.
3925
3926 The special symbol name @samp{.} indicates the location counter. You
3927 may only use this within a @code{SECTIONS} command. @xref{Location Counter}.
3928
3929 The semicolon after @var{expression} is required.
3930
3931 Expressions are defined below; see @ref{Expressions}.
3932
3933 You may write symbol assignments as commands in their own right, or as
3934 statements within a @code{SECTIONS} command, or as part of an output
3935 section description in a @code{SECTIONS} command.
3936
3937 The section of the symbol will be set from the section of the
3938 expression; for more information, see @ref{Expression Section}.
3939
3940 Here is an example showing the three different places that symbol
3941 assignments may be used:
3942
3943 @smallexample
3944 floating_point = 0;
3945 SECTIONS
3946 @{
3947 .text :
3948 @{
3949 *(.text)
3950 _etext = .;
3951 @}
3952 _bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3;
3953 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3954 @}
3955 @end smallexample
3956 @noindent
3957 In this example, the symbol @samp{floating_point} will be defined as
3958 zero. The symbol @samp{_etext} will be defined as the address following
3959 the last @samp{.text} input section. The symbol @samp{_bdata} will be
3960 defined as the address following the @samp{.text} output section aligned
3961 upward to a 4 byte boundary.
3962
3963 @node HIDDEN
3964 @subsection HIDDEN
3965 @cindex HIDDEN
3966 For ELF targeted ports, define a symbol that will be hidden and won't be
3967 exported. The syntax is @code{HIDDEN(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
3968
3969 Here is the example from @ref{Simple Assignments}, rewritten to use
3970 @code{HIDDEN}:
3971
3972 @smallexample
3973 HIDDEN(floating_point = 0);
3974 SECTIONS
3975 @{
3976 .text :
3977 @{
3978 *(.text)
3979 HIDDEN(_etext = .);
3980 @}
3981 HIDDEN(_bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3);
3982 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3983 @}
3984 @end smallexample
3985 @noindent
3986 In this case none of the three symbols will be visible outside this module.
3987
3988 @node PROVIDE
3989 @subsection PROVIDE
3990 @cindex PROVIDE
3991 In some cases, it is desirable for a linker script to define a symbol
3992 only if it is referenced and is not defined by any object included in
3993 the link. For example, traditional linkers defined the symbol
3994 @samp{etext}. However, ANSI C requires that the user be able to use
3995 @samp{etext} as a function name without encountering an error. The
3996 @code{PROVIDE} keyword may be used to define a symbol, such as
3997 @samp{etext}, only if it is referenced but not defined. The syntax is
3998 @code{PROVIDE(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
3999
4000 Here is an example of using @code{PROVIDE} to define @samp{etext}:
4001 @smallexample
4002 SECTIONS
4003 @{
4004 .text :
4005 @{
4006 *(.text)
4007 _etext = .;
4008 PROVIDE(etext = .);
4009 @}
4010 @}
4011 @end smallexample
4012
4013 In this example, if the program defines @samp{_etext} (with a leading
4014 underscore), the linker will give a multiple definition error. If, on
4015 the other hand, the program defines @samp{etext} (with no leading
4016 underscore), the linker will silently use the definition in the program.
4017 If the program references @samp{etext} but does not define it, the
4018 linker will use the definition in the linker script.
4019
4020 Note - the @code{PROVIDE} directive considers a common symbol to be
4021 defined, even though such a symbol could be combined with the symbol
4022 that the @code{PROVIDE} would create. This is particularly important
4023 when considering constructor and destructor list symbols such as
4024 @samp{__CTOR_LIST__} as these are often defined as common symbols.
4025
4026 @node PROVIDE_HIDDEN
4027 @subsection PROVIDE_HIDDEN
4028 @cindex PROVIDE_HIDDEN
4029 Similar to @code{PROVIDE}. For ELF targeted ports, the symbol will be
4030 hidden and won't be exported.
4031
4032 @node Source Code Reference
4033 @subsection Source Code Reference
4034
4035 Accessing a linker script defined variable from source code is not
4036 intuitive. In particular a linker script symbol is not equivalent to
4037 a variable declaration in a high level language, it is instead a
4038 symbol that does not have a value.
4039
4040 Before going further, it is important to note that compilers often
4041 transform names in the source code into different names when they are
4042 stored in the symbol table. For example, Fortran compilers commonly
4043 prepend or append an underscore, and C++ performs extensive @samp{name
4044 mangling}. Therefore there might be a discrepancy between the name
4045 of a variable as it is used in source code and the name of the same
4046 variable as it is defined in a linker script. For example in C a
4047 linker script variable might be referred to as:
4048
4049 @smallexample
4050 extern int foo;
4051 @end smallexample
4052
4053 But in the linker script it might be defined as:
4054
4055 @smallexample
4056 _foo = 1000;
4057 @end smallexample
4058
4059 In the remaining examples however it is assumed that no name
4060 transformation has taken place.
4061
4062 When a symbol is declared in a high level language such as C, two
4063 things happen. The first is that the compiler reserves enough space
4064 in the program's memory to hold the @emph{value} of the symbol. The
4065 second is that the compiler creates an entry in the program's symbol
4066 table which holds the symbol's @emph{address}. ie the symbol table
4067 contains the address of the block of memory holding the symbol's
4068 value. So for example the following C declaration, at file scope:
4069
4070 @smallexample
4071 int foo = 1000;
4072 @end smallexample
4073
4074 creates an entry called @samp{foo} in the symbol table. This entry
4075 holds the address of an @samp{int} sized block of memory where the
4076 number 1000 is initially stored.
4077
4078 When a program references a symbol the compiler generates code that
4079 first accesses the symbol table to find the address of the symbol's
4080 memory block and then code to read the value from that memory block.
4081 So:
4082
4083 @smallexample
4084 foo = 1;
4085 @end smallexample
4086
4087 looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets the address
4088 associated with this symbol and then writes the value 1 into that
4089 address. Whereas:
4090
4091 @smallexample
4092 int * a = & foo;
4093 @end smallexample
4094
4095 looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets its address
4096 and then copies this address into the block of memory associated with
4097 the variable @samp{a}.
4098
4099 Linker scripts symbol declarations, by contrast, create an entry in
4100 the symbol table but do not assign any memory to them. Thus they are
4101 an address without a value. So for example the linker script definition:
4102
4103 @smallexample
4104 foo = 1000;
4105 @end smallexample
4106
4107 creates an entry in the symbol table called @samp{foo} which holds
4108 the address of memory location 1000, but nothing special is stored at
4109 address 1000. This means that you cannot access the @emph{value} of a
4110 linker script defined symbol - it has no value - all you can do is
4111 access the @emph{address} of a linker script defined symbol.
4112
4113 Hence when you are using a linker script defined symbol in source code
4114 you should always take the address of the symbol, and never attempt to
4115 use its value. For example suppose you want to copy the contents of a
4116 section of memory called .ROM into a section called .FLASH and the
4117 linker script contains these declarations:
4118
4119 @smallexample
4120 @group
4121 start_of_ROM = .ROM;
4122 end_of_ROM = .ROM + sizeof (.ROM);
4123 start_of_FLASH = .FLASH;
4124 @end group
4125 @end smallexample
4126
4127 Then the C source code to perform the copy would be:
4128
4129 @smallexample
4130 @group
4131 extern char start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM, start_of_FLASH;
4132
4133 memcpy (& start_of_FLASH, & start_of_ROM, & end_of_ROM - & start_of_ROM);
4134 @end group
4135 @end smallexample
4136
4137 Note the use of the @samp{&} operators. These are correct.
4138 Alternatively the symbols can be treated as the names of vectors or
4139 arrays and then the code will again work as expected:
4140
4141 @smallexample
4142 @group
4143 extern char start_of_ROM[], end_of_ROM[], start_of_FLASH[];
4144
4145 memcpy (start_of_FLASH, start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM - start_of_ROM);
4146 @end group
4147 @end smallexample
4148
4149 Note how using this method does not require the use of @samp{&}
4150 operators.
4151
4152 @node SECTIONS
4153 @section SECTIONS Command
4154 @kindex SECTIONS
4155 The @code{SECTIONS} command tells the linker how to map input sections
4156 into output sections, and how to place the output sections in memory.
4157
4158 The format of the @code{SECTIONS} command is:
4159 @smallexample
4160 SECTIONS
4161 @{
4162 @var{sections-command}
4163 @var{sections-command}
4164 @dots{}
4165 @}
4166 @end smallexample
4167
4168 Each @var{sections-command} may of be one of the following:
4169
4170 @itemize @bullet
4171 @item
4172 an @code{ENTRY} command (@pxref{Entry Point,,Entry command})
4173 @item
4174 a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
4175 @item
4176 an output section description
4177 @item
4178 an overlay description
4179 @end itemize
4180
4181 The @code{ENTRY} command and symbol assignments are permitted inside the
4182 @code{SECTIONS} command for convenience in using the location counter in
4183 those commands. This can also make the linker script easier to
4184 understand because you can use those commands at meaningful points in
4185 the layout of the output file.
4186
4187 Output section descriptions and overlay descriptions are described
4188 below.
4189
4190 If you do not use a @code{SECTIONS} command in your linker script, the
4191 linker will place each input section into an identically named output
4192 section in the order that the sections are first encountered in the
4193 input files. If all input sections are present in the first file, for
4194 example, the order of sections in the output file will match the order
4195 in the first input file. The first section will be at address zero.
4196
4197 @menu
4198 * Output Section Description:: Output section description
4199 * Output Section Name:: Output section name
4200 * Output Section Address:: Output section address
4201 * Input Section:: Input section description
4202 * Output Section Data:: Output section data
4203 * Output Section Keywords:: Output section keywords
4204 * Output Section Discarding:: Output section discarding
4205 * Output Section Attributes:: Output section attributes
4206 * Overlay Description:: Overlay description
4207 @end menu
4208
4209 @node Output Section Description
4210 @subsection Output Section Description
4211 The full description of an output section looks like this:
4212 @smallexample
4213 @group
4214 @var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
4215 [AT(@var{lma})]
4216 [ALIGN(@var{section_align}) | ALIGN_WITH_INPUT]
4217 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
4218 [@var{constraint}]
4219 @{
4220 @var{output-section-command}
4221 @var{output-section-command}
4222 @dots{}
4223 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}] [,]
4224 @end group
4225 @end smallexample
4226
4227 Most output sections do not use most of the optional section attributes.
4228
4229 The whitespace around @var{section} is required, so that the section
4230 name is unambiguous. The colon and the curly braces are also required.
4231 The comma at the end may be required if a @var{fillexp} is used and
4232 the next @var{sections-command} looks like a continuation of the expression.
4233 The line breaks and other white space are optional.
4234
4235 Each @var{output-section-command} may be one of the following:
4236
4237 @itemize @bullet
4238 @item
4239 a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
4240 @item
4241 an input section description (@pxref{Input Section})
4242 @item
4243 data values to include directly (@pxref{Output Section Data})
4244 @item
4245 a special output section keyword (@pxref{Output Section Keywords})
4246 @end itemize
4247
4248 @node Output Section Name
4249 @subsection Output Section Name
4250 @cindex name, section
4251 @cindex section name
4252 The name of the output section is @var{section}. @var{section} must
4253 meet the constraints of your output format. In formats which only
4254 support a limited number of sections, such as @code{a.out}, the name
4255 must be one of the names supported by the format (@code{a.out}, for
4256 example, allows only @samp{.text}, @samp{.data} or @samp{.bss}). If the
4257 output format supports any number of sections, but with numbers and not
4258 names (as is the case for Oasys), the name should be supplied as a
4259 quoted numeric string. A section name may consist of any sequence of
4260 characters, but a name which contains any unusual characters such as
4261 commas must be quoted.
4262
4263 The output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} is special; @ref{Output Section
4264 Discarding}.
4265
4266 @node Output Section Address
4267 @subsection Output Section Address
4268 @cindex address, section
4269 @cindex section address
4270 The @var{address} is an expression for the VMA (the virtual memory
4271 address) of the output section. This address is optional, but if it
4272 is provided then the output address will be set exactly as specified.
4273
4274 If the output address is not specified then one will be chosen for the
4275 section, based on the heuristic below. This address will be adjusted
4276 to fit the alignment requirement of the output section. The
4277 alignment requirement is the strictest alignment of any input section
4278 contained within the output section.
4279
4280 The output section address heuristic is as follows:
4281
4282 @itemize @bullet
4283 @item
4284 If an output memory @var{region} is set for the section then it
4285 is added to this region and its address will be the next free address
4286 in that region.
4287
4288 @item
4289 If the MEMORY command has been used to create a list of memory
4290 regions then the first region which has attributes compatible with the
4291 section is selected to contain it. The section's output address will
4292 be the next free address in that region; @ref{MEMORY}.
4293
4294 @item
4295 If no memory regions were specified, or none match the section then
4296 the output address will be based on the current value of the location
4297 counter.
4298 @end itemize
4299
4300 @noindent
4301 For example:
4302
4303 @smallexample
4304 .text . : @{ *(.text) @}
4305 @end smallexample
4306
4307 @noindent
4308 and
4309
4310 @smallexample
4311 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
4312 @end smallexample
4313
4314 @noindent
4315 are subtly different. The first will set the address of the
4316 @samp{.text} output section to the current value of the location
4317 counter. The second will set it to the current value of the location
4318 counter aligned to the strictest alignment of any of the @samp{.text}
4319 input sections.
4320
4321 The @var{address} may be an arbitrary expression; @ref{Expressions}.
4322 For example, if you want to align the section on a 0x10 byte boundary,
4323 so that the lowest four bits of the section address are zero, you could
4324 do something like this:
4325 @smallexample
4326 .text ALIGN(0x10) : @{ *(.text) @}
4327 @end smallexample
4328 @noindent
4329 This works because @code{ALIGN} returns the current location counter
4330 aligned upward to the specified value.
4331
4332 Specifying @var{address} for a section will change the value of the
4333 location counter, provided that the section is non-empty. (Empty
4334 sections are ignored).
4335
4336 @node Input Section
4337 @subsection Input Section Description
4338 @cindex input sections
4339 @cindex mapping input sections to output sections
4340 The most common output section command is an input section description.
4341
4342 The input section description is the most basic linker script operation.
4343 You use output sections to tell the linker how to lay out your program
4344 in memory. You use input section descriptions to tell the linker how to
4345 map the input files into your memory layout.
4346
4347 @menu
4348 * Input Section Basics:: Input section basics
4349 * Input Section Wildcards:: Input section wildcard patterns
4350 * Input Section Common:: Input section for common symbols
4351 * Input Section Keep:: Input section and garbage collection
4352 * Input Section Example:: Input section example
4353 @end menu
4354
4355 @node Input Section Basics
4356 @subsubsection Input Section Basics
4357 @cindex input section basics
4358 An input section description consists of a file name optionally followed
4359 by a list of section names in parentheses.
4360
4361 The file name and the section name may be wildcard patterns, which we
4362 describe further below (@pxref{Input Section Wildcards}).
4363
4364 The most common input section description is to include all input
4365 sections with a particular name in the output section. For example, to
4366 include all input @samp{.text} sections, you would write:
4367 @smallexample
4368 *(.text)
4369 @end smallexample
4370 @noindent
4371 Here the @samp{*} is a wildcard which matches any file name. To exclude a list
4372 @cindex EXCLUDE_FILE
4373 of files from matching the file name wildcard, EXCLUDE_FILE may be used to
4374 match all files except the ones specified in the EXCLUDE_FILE list. For
4375 example:
4376 @smallexample
4377 EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) *(.ctors)
4378 @end smallexample
4379 @noindent
4380 will cause all .ctors sections from all files except @file{crtend.o}
4381 and @file{otherfile.o} to be included. The EXCLUDE_FILE can also be
4382 placed inside the section list, for example:
4383 @smallexample
4384 *(EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) .ctors)
4385 @end smallexample
4386 @noindent
4387 The result of this is identically to the previous example. Supporting
4388 two syntaxes for EXCLUDE_FILE is useful if the section list contains
4389 more than one section, as described below.
4390
4391 There are two ways to include more than one section:
4392 @smallexample
4393 *(.text .rdata)
4394 *(.text) *(.rdata)
4395 @end smallexample
4396 @noindent
4397 The difference between these is the order in which the @samp{.text} and
4398 @samp{.rdata} input sections will appear in the output section. In the
4399 first example, they will be intermingled, appearing in the same order as
4400 they are found in the linker input. In the second example, all
4401 @samp{.text} input sections will appear first, followed by all
4402 @samp{.rdata} input sections.
4403
4404 When using EXCLUDE_FILE with more than one section, if the exclusion
4405 is within the section list then the exclusion only applies to the
4406 immediately following section, for example:
4407 @smallexample
4408 *(EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) .text .rdata)
4409 @end smallexample
4410 @noindent
4411 will cause all @samp{.text} sections from all files except
4412 @file{somefile.o} to be included, while all @samp{.rdata} sections
4413 from all files, including @file{somefile.o}, will be included. To
4414 exclude the @samp{.rdata} sections from @file{somefile.o} the example
4415 could be modified to:
4416 @smallexample
4417 *(EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) .text EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) .rdata)
4418 @end smallexample
4419 @noindent
4420 Alternatively, placing the EXCLUDE_FILE outside of the section list,
4421 before the input file selection, will cause the exclusion to apply for
4422 all sections. Thus the previous example can be rewritten as:
4423 @smallexample
4424 EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) *(.text .rdata)
4425 @end smallexample
4426
4427 You can specify a file name to include sections from a particular file.
4428 You would do this if one or more of your files contain special data that
4429 needs to be at a particular location in memory. For example:
4430 @smallexample
4431 data.o(.data)
4432 @end smallexample
4433
4434 To refine the sections that are included based on the section flags
4435 of an input section, INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS may be used.
4436
4437 Here is a simple example for using Section header flags for ELF sections:
4438
4439 @smallexample
4440 @group
4441 SECTIONS @{
4442 .text : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (SHF_MERGE & SHF_STRINGS) *(.text) @}
4443 .text2 : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (!SHF_WRITE) *(.text) @}
4444 @}
4445 @end group
4446 @end smallexample
4447
4448 In this example, the output section @samp{.text} will be comprised of any
4449 input section matching the name *(.text) whose section header flags
4450 @code{SHF_MERGE} and @code{SHF_STRINGS} are set. The output section
4451 @samp{.text2} will be comprised of any input section matching the name *(.text)
4452 whose section header flag @code{SHF_WRITE} is clear.
4453
4454 You can also specify files within archives by writing a pattern
4455 matching the archive, a colon, then the pattern matching the file,
4456 with no whitespace around the colon.
4457
4458 @table @samp
4459 @item archive:file
4460 matches file within archive
4461 @item archive:
4462 matches the whole archive
4463 @item :file
4464 matches file but not one in an archive
4465 @end table
4466
4467 Either one or both of @samp{archive} and @samp{file} can contain shell
4468 wildcards. On DOS based file systems, the linker will assume that a
4469 single letter followed by a colon is a drive specifier, so
4470 @samp{c:myfile.o} is a simple file specification, not @samp{myfile.o}
4471 within an archive called @samp{c}. @samp{archive:file} filespecs may
4472 also be used within an @code{EXCLUDE_FILE} list, but may not appear in
4473 other linker script contexts. For instance, you cannot extract a file
4474 from an archive by using @samp{archive:file} in an @code{INPUT}
4475 command.
4476
4477 If you use a file name without a list of sections, then all sections in
4478 the input file will be included in the output section. This is not
4479 commonly done, but it may by useful on occasion. For example:
4480 @smallexample
4481 data.o
4482 @end smallexample
4483
4484 When you use a file name which is not an @samp{archive:file} specifier
4485 and does not contain any wild card
4486 characters, the linker will first see if you also specified the file
4487 name on the linker command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. If you
4488 did not, the linker will attempt to open the file as an input file, as
4489 though it appeared on the command line. Note that this differs from an
4490 @code{INPUT} command, because the linker will not search for the file in
4491 the archive search path.
4492
4493 @node Input Section Wildcards
4494 @subsubsection Input Section Wildcard Patterns
4495 @cindex input section wildcards
4496 @cindex wildcard file name patterns
4497 @cindex file name wildcard patterns
4498 @cindex section name wildcard patterns
4499 In an input section description, either the file name or the section
4500 name or both may be wildcard patterns.
4501
4502 The file name of @samp{*} seen in many examples is a simple wildcard
4503 pattern for the file name.
4504
4505 The wildcard patterns are like those used by the Unix shell.
4506
4507 @table @samp
4508 @item *
4509 matches any number of characters
4510 @item ?
4511 matches any single character
4512 @item [@var{chars}]
4513 matches a single instance of any of the @var{chars}; the @samp{-}
4514 character may be used to specify a range of characters, as in
4515 @samp{[a-z]} to match any lower case letter
4516 @item \
4517 quotes the following character
4518 @end table
4519
4520 When a file name is matched with a wildcard, the wildcard characters
4521 will not match a @samp{/} character (used to separate directory names on
4522 Unix). A pattern consisting of a single @samp{*} character is an
4523 exception; it will always match any file name, whether it contains a
4524 @samp{/} or not. In a section name, the wildcard characters will match
4525 a @samp{/} character.
4526
4527 File name wildcard patterns only match files which are explicitly
4528 specified on the command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. The linker
4529 does not search directories to expand wildcards.
4530
4531 If a file name matches more than one wildcard pattern, or if a file name
4532 appears explicitly and is also matched by a wildcard pattern, the linker
4533 will use the first match in the linker script. For example, this
4534 sequence of input section descriptions is probably in error, because the
4535 @file{data.o} rule will not be used:
4536 @smallexample
4537 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
4538 .data1 : @{ data.o(.data) @}
4539 @end smallexample
4540
4541 @cindex SORT_BY_NAME
4542 Normally, the linker will place files and sections matched by wildcards
4543 in the order in which they are seen during the link. You can change
4544 this by using the @code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword, which appears before a wildcard
4545 pattern in parentheses (e.g., @code{SORT_BY_NAME(.text*)}). When the
4546 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword is used, the linker will sort the files or sections
4547 into ascending order by name before placing them in the output file.
4548
4549 @cindex SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT
4550 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
4551 difference is @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} will sort sections into
4552 descending order by alignment before placing them in the output file.
4553 Larger alignments are placed before smaller alignments in order to
4554 reduce the amount of padding necessary.
4555
4556 @cindex SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY
4557 @code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
4558 difference is @code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} will sort sections into
4559 ascending order by numerical value of the GCC init_priority attribute
4560 encoded in the section name before placing them in the output file.
4561
4562 @cindex SORT
4563 @code{SORT} is an alias for @code{SORT_BY_NAME}.
4564
4565 When there are nested section sorting commands in linker script, there
4566 can be at most 1 level of nesting for section sorting commands.
4567
4568 @enumerate
4569 @item
4570 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
4571 It will sort the input sections by name first, then by alignment if two
4572 sections have the same name.
4573 @item
4574 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
4575 It will sort the input sections by alignment first, then by name if two
4576 sections have the same alignment.
4577 @item
4578 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)) is
4579 treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern).
4580 @item
4581 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern))
4582 is treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern).
4583 @item
4584 All other nested section sorting commands are invalid.
4585 @end enumerate
4586
4587 When both command-line section sorting option and linker script
4588 section sorting command are used, section sorting command always
4589 takes precedence over the command-line option.
4590
4591 If the section sorting command in linker script isn't nested, the
4592 command-line option will make the section sorting command to be
4593 treated as nested sorting command.
4594
4595 @enumerate
4596 @item
4597 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern ) with
4598 @option{--sort-sections alignment} is equivalent to
4599 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
4600 @item
4601 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern) with
4602 @option{--sort-section name} is equivalent to
4603 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
4604 @end enumerate
4605
4606 If the section sorting command in linker script is nested, the
4607 command-line option will be ignored.
4608
4609 @cindex SORT_NONE
4610 @code{SORT_NONE} disables section sorting by ignoring the command-line
4611 section sorting option.
4612
4613 If you ever get confused about where input sections are going, use the
4614 @samp{-M} linker option to generate a map file. The map file shows
4615 precisely how input sections are mapped to output sections.
4616
4617 This example shows how wildcard patterns might be used to partition
4618 files. This linker script directs the linker to place all @samp{.text}
4619 sections in @samp{.text} and all @samp{.bss} sections in @samp{.bss}.
4620 The linker will place the @samp{.data} section from all files beginning
4621 with an upper case character in @samp{.DATA}; for all other files, the
4622 linker will place the @samp{.data} section in @samp{.data}.
4623 @smallexample
4624 @group
4625 SECTIONS @{
4626 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
4627 .DATA : @{ [A-Z]*(.data) @}
4628 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
4629 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
4630 @}
4631 @end group
4632 @end smallexample
4633
4634 @node Input Section Common
4635 @subsubsection Input Section for Common Symbols
4636 @cindex common symbol placement
4637 @cindex uninitialized data placement
4638 A special notation is needed for common symbols, because in many object
4639 file formats common symbols do not have a particular input section. The
4640 linker treats common symbols as though they are in an input section
4641 named @samp{COMMON}.
4642
4643 You may use file names with the @samp{COMMON} section just as with any
4644 other input sections. You can use this to place common symbols from a
4645 particular input file in one section while common symbols from other
4646 input files are placed in another section.
4647
4648 In most cases, common symbols in input files will be placed in the
4649 @samp{.bss} section in the output file. For example:
4650 @smallexample
4651 .bss @{ *(.bss) *(COMMON) @}
4652 @end smallexample
4653
4654 @cindex scommon section
4655 @cindex small common symbols
4656 Some object file formats have more than one type of common symbol. For
4657 example, the MIPS ELF object file format distinguishes standard common
4658 symbols and small common symbols. In this case, the linker will use a
4659 different special section name for other types of common symbols. In
4660 the case of MIPS ELF, the linker uses @samp{COMMON} for standard common
4661 symbols and @samp{.scommon} for small common symbols. This permits you
4662 to map the different types of common symbols into memory at different
4663 locations.
4664
4665 @cindex [COMMON]
4666 You will sometimes see @samp{[COMMON]} in old linker scripts. This
4667 notation is now considered obsolete. It is equivalent to
4668 @samp{*(COMMON)}.
4669
4670 @node Input Section Keep
4671 @subsubsection Input Section and Garbage Collection
4672 @cindex KEEP
4673 @cindex garbage collection
4674 When link-time garbage collection is in use (@samp{--gc-sections}),
4675 it is often useful to mark sections that should not be eliminated.
4676 This is accomplished by surrounding an input section's wildcard entry
4677 with @code{KEEP()}, as in @code{KEEP(*(.init))} or
4678 @code{KEEP(SORT_BY_NAME(*)(.ctors))}.
4679
4680 @node Input Section Example
4681 @subsubsection Input Section Example
4682 The following example is a complete linker script. It tells the linker
4683 to read all of the sections from file @file{all.o} and place them at the
4684 start of output section @samp{outputa} which starts at location
4685 @samp{0x10000}. All of section @samp{.input1} from file @file{foo.o}
4686 follows immediately, in the same output section. All of section
4687 @samp{.input2} from @file{foo.o} goes into output section
4688 @samp{outputb}, followed by section @samp{.input1} from @file{foo1.o}.
4689 All of the remaining @samp{.input1} and @samp{.input2} sections from any
4690 files are written to output section @samp{outputc}.
4691
4692 @smallexample
4693 @group
4694 SECTIONS @{
4695 outputa 0x10000 :
4696 @{
4697 all.o
4698 foo.o (.input1)
4699 @}
4700 @end group
4701 @group
4702 outputb :
4703 @{
4704 foo.o (.input2)
4705 foo1.o (.input1)
4706 @}
4707 @end group
4708 @group
4709 outputc :
4710 @{
4711 *(.input1)
4712 *(.input2)
4713 @}
4714 @}
4715 @end group
4716 @end smallexample
4717
4718 If an output section's name is the same as the input section's name
4719 and is representable as a C identifier, then the linker will
4720 automatically @pxref{PROVIDE} two symbols: __start_SECNAME and
4721 __stop_SECNAME, where SECNAME is the name of the section. These
4722 indicate the start address and end address of the output section
4723 respectively. Note: most section names are not representable as
4724 C identifiers because they contain a @samp{.} character.
4725
4726 @node Output Section Data
4727 @subsection Output Section Data
4728 @cindex data
4729 @cindex section data
4730 @cindex output section data
4731 @kindex BYTE(@var{expression})
4732 @kindex SHORT(@var{expression})
4733 @kindex LONG(@var{expression})
4734 @kindex QUAD(@var{expression})
4735 @kindex SQUAD(@var{expression})
4736 You can include explicit bytes of data in an output section by using
4737 @code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, @code{QUAD}, or @code{SQUAD} as
4738 an output section command. Each keyword is followed by an expression in
4739 parentheses providing the value to store (@pxref{Expressions}). The
4740 value of the expression is stored at the current value of the location
4741 counter.
4742
4743 The @code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, and @code{QUAD} commands
4744 store one, two, four, and eight bytes (respectively). After storing the
4745 bytes, the location counter is incremented by the number of bytes
4746 stored.
4747
4748 For example, this will store the byte 1 followed by the four byte value
4749 of the symbol @samp{addr}:
4750 @smallexample
4751 BYTE(1)
4752 LONG(addr)
4753 @end smallexample
4754
4755 When using a 64 bit host or target, @code{QUAD} and @code{SQUAD} are the
4756 same; they both store an 8 byte, or 64 bit, value. When both host and
4757 target are 32 bits, an expression is computed as 32 bits. In this case
4758 @code{QUAD} stores a 32 bit value zero extended to 64 bits, and
4759 @code{SQUAD} stores a 32 bit value sign extended to 64 bits.
4760
4761 If the object file format of the output file has an explicit endianness,
4762 which is the normal case, the value will be stored in that endianness.
4763 When the object file format does not have an explicit endianness, as is
4764 true of, for example, S-records, the value will be stored in the
4765 endianness of the first input object file.
4766
4767 Note---these commands only work inside a section description and not
4768 between them, so the following will produce an error from the linker:
4769 @smallexample
4770 SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) @}@ LONG(1) .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4771 @end smallexample
4772 whereas this will work:
4773 @smallexample
4774 SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) ; LONG(1) @}@ .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4775 @end smallexample
4776
4777 @kindex FILL(@var{expression})
4778 @cindex holes, filling
4779 @cindex unspecified memory
4780 You may use the @code{FILL} command to set the fill pattern for the
4781 current section. It is followed by an expression in parentheses. Any
4782 otherwise unspecified regions of memory within the section (for example,
4783 gaps left due to the required alignment of input sections) are filled
4784 with the value of the expression, repeated as
4785 necessary. A @code{FILL} statement covers memory locations after the
4786 point at which it occurs in the section definition; by including more
4787 than one @code{FILL} statement, you can have different fill patterns in
4788 different parts of an output section.
4789
4790 This example shows how to fill unspecified regions of memory with the
4791 value @samp{0x90}:
4792 @smallexample
4793 FILL(0x90909090)
4794 @end smallexample
4795
4796 The @code{FILL} command is similar to the @samp{=@var{fillexp}} output
4797 section attribute, but it only affects the
4798 part of the section following the @code{FILL} command, rather than the
4799 entire section. If both are used, the @code{FILL} command takes
4800 precedence. @xref{Output Section Fill}, for details on the fill
4801 expression.
4802
4803 @node Output Section Keywords
4804 @subsection Output Section Keywords
4805 There are a couple of keywords which can appear as output section
4806 commands.
4807
4808 @table @code
4809 @kindex CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4810 @cindex input filename symbols
4811 @cindex filename symbols
4812 @item CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4813 The command tells the linker to create a symbol for each input file.
4814 The name of each symbol will be the name of the corresponding input
4815 file. The section of each symbol will be the output section in which
4816 the @code{CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS} command appears.
4817
4818 This is conventional for the a.out object file format. It is not
4819 normally used for any other object file format.
4820
4821 @kindex CONSTRUCTORS
4822 @cindex C++ constructors, arranging in link
4823 @cindex constructors, arranging in link
4824 @item CONSTRUCTORS
4825 When linking using the a.out object file format, the linker uses an
4826 unusual set construct to support C++ global constructors and
4827 destructors. When linking object file formats which do not support
4828 arbitrary sections, such as ECOFF and XCOFF, the linker will
4829 automatically recognize C++ global constructors and destructors by name.
4830 For these object file formats, the @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command tells the
4831 linker to place constructor information in the output section where the
4832 @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command appears. The @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command is
4833 ignored for other object file formats.
4834
4835 The symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_LIST__}} marks the start of the global
4836 constructors, and the symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_END__}} marks the end.
4837 Similarly, @w{@code{__DTOR_LIST__}} and @w{@code{__DTOR_END__}} mark
4838 the start and end of the global destructors. The
4839 first word in the list is the number of entries, followed by the address
4840 of each constructor or destructor, followed by a zero word. The
4841 compiler must arrange to actually run the code. For these object file
4842 formats @sc{gnu} C++ normally calls constructors from a subroutine
4843 @code{__main}; a call to @code{__main} is automatically inserted into
4844 the startup code for @code{main}. @sc{gnu} C++ normally runs
4845 destructors either by using @code{atexit}, or directly from the function
4846 @code{exit}.
4847
4848 For object file formats such as @code{COFF} or @code{ELF} which support
4849 arbitrary section names, @sc{gnu} C++ will normally arrange to put the
4850 addresses of global constructors and destructors into the @code{.ctors}
4851 and @code{.dtors} sections. Placing the following sequence into your
4852 linker script will build the sort of table which the @sc{gnu} C++
4853 runtime code expects to see.
4854
4855 @smallexample
4856 __CTOR_LIST__ = .;
4857 LONG((__CTOR_END__ - __CTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4858 *(.ctors)
4859 LONG(0)
4860 __CTOR_END__ = .;
4861 __DTOR_LIST__ = .;
4862 LONG((__DTOR_END__ - __DTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4863 *(.dtors)
4864 LONG(0)
4865 __DTOR_END__ = .;
4866 @end smallexample
4867
4868 If you are using the @sc{gnu} C++ support for initialization priority,
4869 which provides some control over the order in which global constructors
4870 are run, you must sort the constructors at link time to ensure that they
4871 are executed in the correct order. When using the @code{CONSTRUCTORS}
4872 command, use @samp{SORT_BY_NAME(CONSTRUCTORS)} instead. When using the
4873 @code{.ctors} and @code{.dtors} sections, use @samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.ctors))} and
4874 @samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.dtors))} instead of just @samp{*(.ctors)} and
4875 @samp{*(.dtors)}.
4876
4877 Normally the compiler and linker will handle these issues automatically,
4878 and you will not need to concern yourself with them. However, you may
4879 need to consider this if you are using C++ and writing your own linker
4880 scripts.
4881
4882 @end table
4883
4884 @node Output Section Discarding
4885 @subsection Output Section Discarding
4886 @cindex discarding sections
4887 @cindex sections, discarding
4888 @cindex removing sections
4889 The linker will not normally create output sections with no contents.
4890 This is for convenience when referring to input sections that may or
4891 may not be present in any of the input files. For example:
4892 @smallexample
4893 .foo : @{ *(.foo) @}
4894 @end smallexample
4895 @noindent
4896 will only create a @samp{.foo} section in the output file if there is a
4897 @samp{.foo} section in at least one input file, and if the input
4898 sections are not all empty. Other link script directives that allocate
4899 space in an output section will also create the output section. So
4900 too will assignments to dot even if the assignment does not create
4901 space, except for @samp{. = 0}, @samp{. = . + 0}, @samp{. = sym},
4902 @samp{. = . + sym} and @samp{. = ALIGN (. != 0, expr, 1)} when
4903 @samp{sym} is an absolute symbol of value 0 defined in the script.
4904 This allows you to force output of an empty section with @samp{. = .}.
4905
4906 The linker will ignore address assignments (@pxref{Output Section Address})
4907 on discarded output sections, except when the linker script defines
4908 symbols in the output section. In that case the linker will obey
4909 the address assignments, possibly advancing dot even though the
4910 section is discarded.
4911
4912 @cindex /DISCARD/
4913 The special output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} may be used to discard
4914 input sections. Any input sections which are assigned to an output
4915 section named @samp{/DISCARD/} are not included in the output file.
4916
4917 @node Output Section Attributes
4918 @subsection Output Section Attributes
4919 @cindex output section attributes
4920 We showed above that the full description of an output section looked
4921 like this:
4922
4923 @smallexample
4924 @group
4925 @var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
4926 [AT(@var{lma})]
4927 [ALIGN(@var{section_align})]
4928 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
4929 [@var{constraint}]
4930 @{
4931 @var{output-section-command}
4932 @var{output-section-command}
4933 @dots{}
4934 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}]
4935 @end group
4936 @end smallexample
4937
4938 We've already described @var{section}, @var{address}, and
4939 @var{output-section-command}. In this section we will describe the
4940 remaining section attributes.
4941
4942 @menu
4943 * Output Section Type:: Output section type
4944 * Output Section LMA:: Output section LMA
4945 * Forced Output Alignment:: Forced Output Alignment
4946 * Forced Input Alignment:: Forced Input Alignment
4947 * Output Section Constraint:: Output section constraint
4948 * Output Section Region:: Output section region
4949 * Output Section Phdr:: Output section phdr
4950 * Output Section Fill:: Output section fill
4951 @end menu
4952
4953 @node Output Section Type
4954 @subsubsection Output Section Type
4955 Each output section may have a type. The type is a keyword in
4956 parentheses. The following types are defined:
4957
4958 @table @code
4959 @item NOLOAD
4960 The section should be marked as not loadable, so that it will not be
4961 loaded into memory when the program is run.
4962 @item DSECT
4963 @itemx COPY
4964 @itemx INFO
4965 @itemx OVERLAY
4966 These type names are supported for backward compatibility, and are
4967 rarely used. They all have the same effect: the section should be
4968 marked as not allocatable, so that no memory is allocated for the
4969 section when the program is run.
4970 @end table
4971
4972 @kindex NOLOAD
4973 @cindex prevent unnecessary loading
4974 @cindex loading, preventing
4975 The linker normally sets the attributes of an output section based on
4976 the input sections which map into it. You can override this by using
4977 the section type. For example, in the script sample below, the
4978 @samp{ROM} section is addressed at memory location @samp{0} and does not
4979 need to be loaded when the program is run.
4980 @smallexample
4981 @group
4982 SECTIONS @{
4983 ROM 0 (NOLOAD) : @{ @dots{} @}
4984 @dots{}
4985 @}
4986 @end group
4987 @end smallexample
4988
4989 @node Output Section LMA
4990 @subsubsection Output Section LMA
4991 @kindex AT>@var{lma_region}
4992 @kindex AT(@var{lma})
4993 @cindex load address
4994 @cindex section load address
4995 Every section has a virtual address (VMA) and a load address (LMA); see
4996 @ref{Basic Script Concepts}. The virtual address is specified by the
4997 @pxref{Output Section Address} described earlier. The load address is
4998 specified by the @code{AT} or @code{AT>} keywords. Specifying a load
4999 address is optional.
5000
5001 The @code{AT} keyword takes an expression as an argument. This
5002 specifies the exact load address of the section. The @code{AT>} keyword
5003 takes the name of a memory region as an argument. @xref{MEMORY}. The
5004 load address of the section is set to the next free address in the
5005 region, aligned to the section's alignment requirements.
5006
5007 If neither @code{AT} nor @code{AT>} is specified for an allocatable
5008 section, the linker will use the following heuristic to determine the
5009 load address:
5010
5011 @itemize @bullet
5012 @item
5013 If the section has a specific VMA address, then this is used as
5014 the LMA address as well.
5015
5016 @item
5017 If the section is not allocatable then its LMA is set to its VMA.
5018
5019 @item
5020 Otherwise if a memory region can be found that is compatible
5021 with the current section, and this region contains at least one
5022 section, then the LMA is set so the difference between the
5023 VMA and LMA is the same as the difference between the VMA and LMA of
5024 the last section in the located region.
5025
5026 @item
5027 If no memory regions have been declared then a default region
5028 that covers the entire address space is used in the previous step.
5029
5030 @item
5031 If no suitable region could be found, or there was no previous
5032 section then the LMA is set equal to the VMA.
5033 @end itemize
5034
5035 @cindex ROM initialized data
5036 @cindex initialized data in ROM
5037 This feature is designed to make it easy to build a ROM image. For
5038 example, the following linker script creates three output sections: one
5039 called @samp{.text}, which starts at @code{0x1000}, one called
5040 @samp{.mdata}, which is loaded at the end of the @samp{.text} section
5041 even though its VMA is @code{0x2000}, and one called @samp{.bss} to hold
5042 uninitialized data at address @code{0x3000}. The symbol @code{_data} is
5043 defined with the value @code{0x2000}, which shows that the location
5044 counter holds the VMA value, not the LMA value.
5045
5046 @smallexample
5047 @group
5048 SECTIONS
5049 @{
5050 .text 0x1000 : @{ *(.text) _etext = . ; @}
5051 .mdata 0x2000 :
5052 AT ( ADDR (.text) + SIZEOF (.text) )
5053 @{ _data = . ; *(.data); _edata = . ; @}
5054 .bss 0x3000 :
5055 @{ _bstart = . ; *(.bss) *(COMMON) ; _bend = . ;@}
5056 @}
5057 @end group
5058 @end smallexample
5059
5060 The run-time initialization code for use with a program generated with
5061 this linker script would include something like the following, to copy
5062 the initialized data from the ROM image to its runtime address. Notice
5063 how this code takes advantage of the symbols defined by the linker
5064 script.
5065
5066 @smallexample
5067 @group
5068 extern char _etext, _data, _edata, _bstart, _bend;
5069 char *src = &_etext;
5070 char *dst = &_data;
5071
5072 /* ROM has data at end of text; copy it. */
5073 while (dst < &_edata)
5074 *dst++ = *src++;
5075
5076 /* Zero bss. */
5077 for (dst = &_bstart; dst< &_bend; dst++)
5078 *dst = 0;
5079 @end group
5080 @end smallexample
5081
5082 @node Forced Output Alignment
5083 @subsubsection Forced Output Alignment
5084 @kindex ALIGN(@var{section_align})
5085 @cindex forcing output section alignment
5086 @cindex output section alignment
5087 You can increase an output section's alignment by using ALIGN. As an
5088 alternative you can enforce that the difference between the VMA and LMA remains
5089 intact throughout this output section with the ALIGN_WITH_INPUT attribute.
5090
5091 @node Forced Input Alignment
5092 @subsubsection Forced Input Alignment
5093 @kindex SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})
5094 @cindex forcing input section alignment
5095 @cindex input section alignment
5096 You can force input section alignment within an output section by using
5097 SUBALIGN. The value specified overrides any alignment given by input
5098 sections, whether larger or smaller.
5099
5100 @node Output Section Constraint
5101 @subsubsection Output Section Constraint
5102 @kindex ONLY_IF_RO
5103 @kindex ONLY_IF_RW
5104 @cindex constraints on output sections
5105 You can specify that an output section should only be created if all
5106 of its input sections are read-only or all of its input sections are
5107 read-write by using the keyword @code{ONLY_IF_RO} and
5108 @code{ONLY_IF_RW} respectively.
5109
5110 @node Output Section Region
5111 @subsubsection Output Section Region
5112 @kindex >@var{region}
5113 @cindex section, assigning to memory region
5114 @cindex memory regions and sections
5115 You can assign a section to a previously defined region of memory by
5116 using @samp{>@var{region}}. @xref{MEMORY}.
5117
5118 Here is a simple example:
5119 @smallexample
5120 @group
5121 MEMORY @{ rom : ORIGIN = 0x1000, LENGTH = 0x1000 @}
5122 SECTIONS @{ ROM : @{ *(.text) @} >rom @}
5123 @end group
5124 @end smallexample
5125
5126 @node Output Section Phdr
5127 @subsubsection Output Section Phdr
5128 @kindex :@var{phdr}
5129 @cindex section, assigning to program header
5130 @cindex program headers and sections
5131 You can assign a section to a previously defined program segment by
5132 using @samp{:@var{phdr}}. @xref{PHDRS}. If a section is assigned to
5133 one or more segments, then all subsequent allocated sections will be
5134 assigned to those segments as well, unless they use an explicitly
5135 @code{:@var{phdr}} modifier. You can use @code{:NONE} to tell the
5136 linker to not put the section in any segment at all.
5137
5138 Here is a simple example:
5139 @smallexample
5140 @group
5141 PHDRS @{ text PT_LOAD ; @}
5142 SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text @}
5143 @end group
5144 @end smallexample
5145
5146 @node Output Section Fill
5147 @subsubsection Output Section Fill
5148 @kindex =@var{fillexp}
5149 @cindex section fill pattern
5150 @cindex fill pattern, entire section
5151 You can set the fill pattern for an entire section by using
5152 @samp{=@var{fillexp}}. @var{fillexp} is an expression
5153 (@pxref{Expressions}). Any otherwise unspecified regions of memory
5154 within the output section (for example, gaps left due to the required
5155 alignment of input sections) will be filled with the value, repeated as
5156 necessary. If the fill expression is a simple hex number, ie. a string
5157 of hex digit starting with @samp{0x} and without a trailing @samp{k} or @samp{M}, then
5158 an arbitrarily long sequence of hex digits can be used to specify the
5159 fill pattern; Leading zeros become part of the pattern too. For all
5160 other cases, including extra parentheses or a unary @code{+}, the fill
5161 pattern is the four least significant bytes of the value of the
5162 expression. In all cases, the number is big-endian.
5163
5164 You can also change the fill value with a @code{FILL} command in the
5165 output section commands; (@pxref{Output Section Data}).
5166
5167 Here is a simple example:
5168 @smallexample
5169 @group
5170 SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} =0x90909090 @}
5171 @end group
5172 @end smallexample
5173
5174 @node Overlay Description
5175 @subsection Overlay Description
5176 @kindex OVERLAY
5177 @cindex overlays
5178 An overlay description provides an easy way to describe sections which
5179 are to be loaded as part of a single memory image but are to be run at
5180 the same memory address. At run time, some sort of overlay manager will
5181 copy the overlaid sections in and out of the runtime memory address as
5182 required, perhaps by simply manipulating addressing bits. This approach
5183 can be useful, for example, when a certain region of memory is faster
5184 than another.
5185
5186 Overlays are described using the @code{OVERLAY} command. The
5187 @code{OVERLAY} command is used within a @code{SECTIONS} command, like an
5188 output section description. The full syntax of the @code{OVERLAY}
5189 command is as follows:
5190 @smallexample
5191 @group
5192 OVERLAY [@var{start}] : [NOCROSSREFS] [AT ( @var{ldaddr} )]
5193 @{
5194 @var{secname1}
5195 @{
5196 @var{output-section-command}
5197 @var{output-section-command}
5198 @dots{}
5199 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
5200 @var{secname2}
5201 @{
5202 @var{output-section-command}
5203 @var{output-section-command}
5204 @dots{}
5205 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
5206 @dots{}
5207 @} [>@var{region}] [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}] [,]
5208 @end group
5209 @end smallexample
5210
5211 Everything is optional except @code{OVERLAY} (a keyword), and each
5212 section must have a name (@var{secname1} and @var{secname2} above). The
5213 section definitions within the @code{OVERLAY} construct are identical to
5214 those within the general @code{SECTIONS} construct (@pxref{SECTIONS}),
5215 except that no addresses and no memory regions may be defined for
5216 sections within an @code{OVERLAY}.
5217
5218 The comma at the end may be required if a @var{fill} is used and
5219 the next @var{sections-command} looks like a continuation of the expression.
5220
5221 The sections are all defined with the same starting address. The load
5222 addresses of the sections are arranged such that they are consecutive in
5223 memory starting at the load address used for the @code{OVERLAY} as a
5224 whole (as with normal section definitions, the load address is optional,
5225 and defaults to the start address; the start address is also optional,
5226 and defaults to the current value of the location counter).
5227
5228 If the @code{NOCROSSREFS} keyword is used, and there are any
5229 references among the sections, the linker will report an error. Since
5230 the sections all run at the same address, it normally does not make
5231 sense for one section to refer directly to another.
5232 @xref{Miscellaneous Commands, NOCROSSREFS}.
5233
5234 For each section within the @code{OVERLAY}, the linker automatically
5235 provides two symbols. The symbol @code{__load_start_@var{secname}} is
5236 defined as the starting load address of the section. The symbol
5237 @code{__load_stop_@var{secname}} is defined as the final load address of
5238 the section. Any characters within @var{secname} which are not legal
5239 within C identifiers are removed. C (or assembler) code may use these
5240 symbols to move the overlaid sections around as necessary.
5241
5242 At the end of the overlay, the value of the location counter is set to
5243 the start address of the overlay plus the size of the largest section.
5244
5245 Here is an example. Remember that this would appear inside a
5246 @code{SECTIONS} construct.
5247 @smallexample
5248 @group
5249 OVERLAY 0x1000 : AT (0x4000)
5250 @{
5251 .text0 @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
5252 .text1 @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
5253 @}
5254 @end group
5255 @end smallexample
5256 @noindent
5257 This will define both @samp{.text0} and @samp{.text1} to start at
5258 address 0x1000. @samp{.text0} will be loaded at address 0x4000, and
5259 @samp{.text1} will be loaded immediately after @samp{.text0}. The
5260 following symbols will be defined if referenced: @code{__load_start_text0},
5261 @code{__load_stop_text0}, @code{__load_start_text1},
5262 @code{__load_stop_text1}.
5263
5264 C code to copy overlay @code{.text1} into the overlay area might look
5265 like the following.
5266
5267 @smallexample
5268 @group
5269 extern char __load_start_text1, __load_stop_text1;
5270 memcpy ((char *) 0x1000, &__load_start_text1,
5271 &__load_stop_text1 - &__load_start_text1);
5272 @end group
5273 @end smallexample
5274
5275 Note that the @code{OVERLAY} command is just syntactic sugar, since
5276 everything it does can be done using the more basic commands. The above
5277 example could have been written identically as follows.
5278
5279 @smallexample
5280 @group
5281 .text0 0x1000 : AT (0x4000) @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
5282 PROVIDE (__load_start_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0));
5283 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0) + SIZEOF (.text0));
5284 .text1 0x1000 : AT (0x4000 + SIZEOF (.text0)) @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
5285 PROVIDE (__load_start_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1));
5286 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1) + SIZEOF (.text1));
5287 . = 0x1000 + MAX (SIZEOF (.text0), SIZEOF (.text1));
5288 @end group
5289 @end smallexample
5290
5291 @node MEMORY
5292 @section MEMORY Command
5293 @kindex MEMORY
5294 @cindex memory regions
5295 @cindex regions of memory
5296 @cindex allocating memory
5297 @cindex discontinuous memory
5298 The linker's default configuration permits allocation of all available
5299 memory. You can override this by using the @code{MEMORY} command.
5300
5301 The @code{MEMORY} command describes the location and size of blocks of
5302 memory in the target. You can use it to describe which memory regions
5303 may be used by the linker, and which memory regions it must avoid. You
5304 can then assign sections to particular memory regions. The linker will
5305 set section addresses based on the memory regions, and will warn about
5306 regions that become too full. The linker will not shuffle sections
5307 around to fit into the available regions.
5308
5309 A linker script may contain many uses of the @code{MEMORY} command,
5310 however, all memory blocks defined are treated as if they were
5311 specified inside a single @code{MEMORY} command. The syntax for
5312 @code{MEMORY} is:
5313 @smallexample
5314 @group
5315 MEMORY
5316 @{
5317 @var{name} [(@var{attr})] : ORIGIN = @var{origin}, LENGTH = @var{len}
5318 @dots{}
5319 @}
5320 @end group
5321 @end smallexample
5322
5323 The @var{name} is a name used in the linker script to refer to the
5324 region. The region name has no meaning outside of the linker script.
5325 Region names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
5326 with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each memory region
5327 must have a distinct name within the @code{MEMORY} command. However you can
5328 add later alias names to existing memory regions with the @ref{REGION_ALIAS}
5329 command.
5330
5331 @cindex memory region attributes
5332 The @var{attr} string is an optional list of attributes that specify
5333 whether to use a particular memory region for an input section which is
5334 not explicitly mapped in the linker script. As described in
5335 @ref{SECTIONS}, if you do not specify an output section for some input
5336 section, the linker will create an output section with the same name as
5337 the input section. If you define region attributes, the linker will use
5338 them to select the memory region for the output section that it creates.
5339
5340 The @var{attr} string must consist only of the following characters:
5341 @table @samp
5342 @item R
5343 Read-only section
5344 @item W
5345 Read/write section
5346 @item X
5347 Executable section
5348 @item A
5349 Allocatable section
5350 @item I
5351 Initialized section
5352 @item L
5353 Same as @samp{I}
5354 @item !
5355 Invert the sense of any of the attributes that follow
5356 @end table
5357
5358 If a unmapped section matches any of the listed attributes other than
5359 @samp{!}, it will be placed in the memory region. The @samp{!}
5360 attribute reverses this test, so that an unmapped section will be placed
5361 in the memory region only if it does not match any of the listed
5362 attributes.
5363
5364 @kindex ORIGIN =
5365 @kindex o =
5366 @kindex org =
5367 The @var{origin} is an numerical expression for the start address of
5368 the memory region. The expression must evaluate to a constant and it
5369 cannot involve any symbols. The keyword @code{ORIGIN} may be
5370 abbreviated to @code{org} or @code{o} (but not, for example,
5371 @code{ORG}).
5372
5373 @kindex LENGTH =
5374 @kindex len =
5375 @kindex l =
5376 The @var{len} is an expression for the size in bytes of the memory
5377 region. As with the @var{origin} expression, the expression must
5378 be numerical only and must evaluate to a constant. The keyword
5379 @code{LENGTH} may be abbreviated to @code{len} or @code{l}.
5380
5381 In the following example, we specify that there are two memory regions
5382 available for allocation: one starting at @samp{0} for 256 kilobytes,
5383 and the other starting at @samp{0x40000000} for four megabytes. The
5384 linker will place into the @samp{rom} memory region every section which
5385 is not explicitly mapped into a memory region, and is either read-only
5386 or executable. The linker will place other sections which are not
5387 explicitly mapped into a memory region into the @samp{ram} memory
5388 region.
5389
5390 @smallexample
5391 @group
5392 MEMORY
5393 @{
5394 rom (rx) : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 256K
5395 ram (!rx) : org = 0x40000000, l = 4M
5396 @}
5397 @end group
5398 @end smallexample
5399
5400 Once you define a memory region, you can direct the linker to place
5401 specific output sections into that memory region by using the
5402 @samp{>@var{region}} output section attribute. For example, if you have
5403 a memory region named @samp{mem}, you would use @samp{>mem} in the
5404 output section definition. @xref{Output Section Region}. If no address
5405 was specified for the output section, the linker will set the address to
5406 the next available address within the memory region. If the combined
5407 output sections directed to a memory region are too large for the
5408 region, the linker will issue an error message.
5409
5410 It is possible to access the origin and length of a memory in an
5411 expression via the @code{ORIGIN(@var{memory})} and
5412 @code{LENGTH(@var{memory})} functions:
5413
5414 @smallexample
5415 @group
5416 _fstack = ORIGIN(ram) + LENGTH(ram) - 4;
5417 @end group
5418 @end smallexample
5419
5420 @node PHDRS
5421 @section PHDRS Command
5422 @kindex PHDRS
5423 @cindex program headers
5424 @cindex ELF program headers
5425 @cindex program segments
5426 @cindex segments, ELF
5427 The ELF object file format uses @dfn{program headers}, also knows as
5428 @dfn{segments}. The program headers describe how the program should be
5429 loaded into memory. You can print them out by using the @code{objdump}
5430 program with the @samp{-p} option.
5431
5432 When you run an ELF program on a native ELF system, the system loader
5433 reads the program headers in order to figure out how to load the
5434 program. This will only work if the program headers are set correctly.
5435 This manual does not describe the details of how the system loader
5436 interprets program headers; for more information, see the ELF ABI.
5437
5438 The linker will create reasonable program headers by default. However,
5439 in some cases, you may need to specify the program headers more
5440 precisely. You may use the @code{PHDRS} command for this purpose. When
5441 the linker sees the @code{PHDRS} command in the linker script, it will
5442 not create any program headers other than the ones specified.
5443
5444 The linker only pays attention to the @code{PHDRS} command when
5445 generating an ELF output file. In other cases, the linker will simply
5446 ignore @code{PHDRS}.
5447
5448 This is the syntax of the @code{PHDRS} command. The words @code{PHDRS},
5449 @code{FILEHDR}, @code{AT}, and @code{FLAGS} are keywords.
5450
5451 @smallexample
5452 @group
5453 PHDRS
5454 @{
5455 @var{name} @var{type} [ FILEHDR ] [ PHDRS ] [ AT ( @var{address} ) ]
5456 [ FLAGS ( @var{flags} ) ] ;
5457 @}
5458 @end group
5459 @end smallexample
5460
5461 The @var{name} is used only for reference in the @code{SECTIONS} command
5462 of the linker script. It is not put into the output file. Program
5463 header names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
5464 with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each program header
5465 must have a distinct name. The headers are processed in order and it
5466 is usual for them to map to sections in ascending load address order.
5467
5468 Certain program header types describe segments of memory which the
5469 system loader will load from the file. In the linker script, you
5470 specify the contents of these segments by placing allocatable output
5471 sections in the segments. You use the @samp{:@var{phdr}} output section
5472 attribute to place a section in a particular segment. @xref{Output
5473 Section Phdr}.
5474
5475 It is normal to put certain sections in more than one segment. This
5476 merely implies that one segment of memory contains another. You may
5477 repeat @samp{:@var{phdr}}, using it once for each segment which should
5478 contain the section.
5479
5480 If you place a section in one or more segments using @samp{:@var{phdr}},
5481 then the linker will place all subsequent allocatable sections which do
5482 not specify @samp{:@var{phdr}} in the same segments. This is for
5483 convenience, since generally a whole set of contiguous sections will be
5484 placed in a single segment. You can use @code{:NONE} to override the
5485 default segment and tell the linker to not put the section in any
5486 segment at all.
5487
5488 @kindex FILEHDR
5489 @kindex PHDRS
5490 You may use the @code{FILEHDR} and @code{PHDRS} keywords after
5491 the program header type to further describe the contents of the segment.
5492 The @code{FILEHDR} keyword means that the segment should include the ELF
5493 file header. The @code{PHDRS} keyword means that the segment should
5494 include the ELF program headers themselves. If applied to a loadable
5495 segment (@code{PT_LOAD}), all prior loadable segments must have one of
5496 these keywords.
5497
5498 The @var{type} may be one of the following. The numbers indicate the
5499 value of the keyword.
5500
5501 @table @asis
5502 @item @code{PT_NULL} (0)
5503 Indicates an unused program header.
5504
5505 @item @code{PT_LOAD} (1)
5506 Indicates that this program header describes a segment to be loaded from
5507 the file.
5508
5509 @item @code{PT_DYNAMIC} (2)
5510 Indicates a segment where dynamic linking information can be found.
5511
5512 @item @code{PT_INTERP} (3)
5513 Indicates a segment where the name of the program interpreter may be
5514 found.
5515
5516 @item @code{PT_NOTE} (4)
5517 Indicates a segment holding note information.
5518
5519 @item @code{PT_SHLIB} (5)
5520 A reserved program header type, defined but not specified by the ELF
5521 ABI.
5522
5523 @item @code{PT_PHDR} (6)
5524 Indicates a segment where the program headers may be found.
5525
5526 @item @code{PT_TLS} (7)
5527 Indicates a segment containing thread local storage.
5528
5529 @item @var{expression}
5530 An expression giving the numeric type of the program header. This may
5531 be used for types not defined above.
5532 @end table
5533
5534 You can specify that a segment should be loaded at a particular address
5535 in memory by using an @code{AT} expression. This is identical to the
5536 @code{AT} command used as an output section attribute (@pxref{Output
5537 Section LMA}). The @code{AT} command for a program header overrides the
5538 output section attribute.
5539
5540 The linker will normally set the segment flags based on the sections
5541 which comprise the segment. You may use the @code{FLAGS} keyword to
5542 explicitly specify the segment flags. The value of @var{flags} must be
5543 an integer. It is used to set the @code{p_flags} field of the program
5544 header.
5545
5546 Here is an example of @code{PHDRS}. This shows a typical set of program
5547 headers used on a native ELF system.
5548
5549 @example
5550 @group
5551 PHDRS
5552 @{
5553 headers PT_PHDR PHDRS ;
5554 interp PT_INTERP ;
5555 text PT_LOAD FILEHDR PHDRS ;
5556 data PT_LOAD ;
5557 dynamic PT_DYNAMIC ;
5558 @}
5559
5560 SECTIONS
5561 @{
5562 . = SIZEOF_HEADERS;
5563 .interp : @{ *(.interp) @} :text :interp
5564 .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text
5565 .rodata : @{ *(.rodata) @} /* defaults to :text */
5566 @dots{}
5567 . = . + 0x1000; /* move to a new page in memory */
5568 .data : @{ *(.data) @} :data
5569 .dynamic : @{ *(.dynamic) @} :data :dynamic
5570 @dots{}
5571 @}
5572 @end group
5573 @end example
5574
5575 @node VERSION
5576 @section VERSION Command
5577 @kindex VERSION @{script text@}
5578 @cindex symbol versions
5579 @cindex version script
5580 @cindex versions of symbols
5581 The linker supports symbol versions when using ELF. Symbol versions are
5582 only useful when using shared libraries. The dynamic linker can use
5583 symbol versions to select a specific version of a function when it runs
5584 a program that may have been linked against an earlier version of the
5585 shared library.
5586
5587 You can include a version script directly in the main linker script, or
5588 you can supply the version script as an implicit linker script. You can
5589 also use the @samp{--version-script} linker option.
5590
5591 The syntax of the @code{VERSION} command is simply
5592 @smallexample
5593 VERSION @{ version-script-commands @}
5594 @end smallexample
5595
5596 The format of the version script commands is identical to that used by
5597 Sun's linker in Solaris 2.5. The version script defines a tree of
5598 version nodes. You specify the node names and interdependencies in the
5599 version script. You can specify which symbols are bound to which
5600 version nodes, and you can reduce a specified set of symbols to local
5601 scope so that they are not globally visible outside of the shared
5602 library.
5603
5604 The easiest way to demonstrate the version script language is with a few
5605 examples.
5606
5607 @smallexample
5608 VERS_1.1 @{
5609 global:
5610 foo1;
5611 local:
5612 old*;
5613 original*;
5614 new*;
5615 @};
5616
5617 VERS_1.2 @{
5618 foo2;
5619 @} VERS_1.1;
5620
5621 VERS_2.0 @{
5622 bar1; bar2;
5623 extern "C++" @{
5624 ns::*;
5625 "f(int, double)";
5626 @};
5627 @} VERS_1.2;
5628 @end smallexample
5629
5630 This example version script defines three version nodes. The first
5631 version node defined is @samp{VERS_1.1}; it has no other dependencies.
5632 The script binds the symbol @samp{foo1} to @samp{VERS_1.1}. It reduces
5633 a number of symbols to local scope so that they are not visible outside
5634 of the shared library; this is done using wildcard patterns, so that any
5635 symbol whose name begins with @samp{old}, @samp{original}, or @samp{new}
5636 is matched. The wildcard patterns available are the same as those used
5637 in the shell when matching filenames (also known as ``globbing'').
5638 However, if you specify the symbol name inside double quotes, then the
5639 name is treated as literal, rather than as a glob pattern.
5640
5641 Next, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_1.2}. This node
5642 depends upon @samp{VERS_1.1}. The script binds the symbol @samp{foo2}
5643 to the version node @samp{VERS_1.2}.
5644
5645 Finally, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_2.0}. This node
5646 depends upon @samp{VERS_1.2}. The scripts binds the symbols @samp{bar1}
5647 and @samp{bar2} are bound to the version node @samp{VERS_2.0}.
5648
5649 When the linker finds a symbol defined in a library which is not
5650 specifically bound to a version node, it will effectively bind it to an
5651 unspecified base version of the library. You can bind all otherwise
5652 unspecified symbols to a given version node by using @samp{global: *;}
5653 somewhere in the version script. Note that it's slightly crazy to use
5654 wildcards in a global spec except on the last version node. Global
5655 wildcards elsewhere run the risk of accidentally adding symbols to the
5656 set exported for an old version. That's wrong since older versions
5657 ought to have a fixed set of symbols.
5658
5659 The names of the version nodes have no specific meaning other than what
5660 they might suggest to the person reading them. The @samp{2.0} version
5661 could just as well have appeared in between @samp{1.1} and @samp{1.2}.
5662 However, this would be a confusing way to write a version script.
5663
5664 Node name can be omitted, provided it is the only version node
5665 in the version script. Such version script doesn't assign any versions to
5666 symbols, only selects which symbols will be globally visible out and which
5667 won't.
5668
5669 @smallexample
5670 @{ global: foo; bar; local: *; @};
5671 @end smallexample
5672
5673 When you link an application against a shared library that has versioned
5674 symbols, the application itself knows which version of each symbol it
5675 requires, and it also knows which version nodes it needs from each
5676 shared library it is linked against. Thus at runtime, the dynamic
5677 loader can make a quick check to make sure that the libraries you have
5678 linked against do in fact supply all of the version nodes that the
5679 application will need to resolve all of the dynamic symbols. In this
5680 way it is possible for the dynamic linker to know with certainty that
5681 all external symbols that it needs will be resolvable without having to
5682 search for each symbol reference.
5683
5684 The symbol versioning is in effect a much more sophisticated way of
5685 doing minor version checking that SunOS does. The fundamental problem
5686 that is being addressed here is that typically references to external
5687 functions are bound on an as-needed basis, and are not all bound when
5688 the application starts up. If a shared library is out of date, a
5689 required interface may be missing; when the application tries to use
5690 that interface, it may suddenly and unexpectedly fail. With symbol
5691 versioning, the user will get a warning when they start their program if
5692 the libraries being used with the application are too old.
5693
5694 There are several GNU extensions to Sun's versioning approach. The
5695 first of these is the ability to bind a symbol to a version node in the
5696 source file where the symbol is defined instead of in the versioning
5697 script. This was done mainly to reduce the burden on the library
5698 maintainer. You can do this by putting something like:
5699 @smallexample
5700 __asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5701 @end smallexample
5702 @noindent
5703 in the C source file. This renames the function @samp{original_foo} to
5704 be an alias for @samp{foo} bound to the version node @samp{VERS_1.1}.
5705 The @samp{local:} directive can be used to prevent the symbol
5706 @samp{original_foo} from being exported. A @samp{.symver} directive
5707 takes precedence over a version script.
5708
5709 The second GNU extension is to allow multiple versions of the same
5710 function to appear in a given shared library. In this way you can make
5711 an incompatible change to an interface without increasing the major
5712 version number of the shared library, while still allowing applications
5713 linked against the old interface to continue to function.
5714
5715 To do this, you must use multiple @samp{.symver} directives in the
5716 source file. Here is an example:
5717
5718 @smallexample
5719 __asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@");
5720 __asm__(".symver old_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5721 __asm__(".symver old_foo1,foo@@VERS_1.2");
5722 __asm__(".symver new_foo,foo@@@@VERS_2.0");
5723 @end smallexample
5724
5725 In this example, @samp{foo@@} represents the symbol @samp{foo} bound to the
5726 unspecified base version of the symbol. The source file that contains this
5727 example would define 4 C functions: @samp{original_foo}, @samp{old_foo},
5728 @samp{old_foo1}, and @samp{new_foo}.
5729
5730 When you have multiple definitions of a given symbol, there needs to be
5731 some way to specify a default version to which external references to
5732 this symbol will be bound. You can do this with the
5733 @samp{foo@@@@VERS_2.0} type of @samp{.symver} directive. You can only
5734 declare one version of a symbol as the default in this manner; otherwise
5735 you would effectively have multiple definitions of the same symbol.
5736
5737 If you wish to bind a reference to a specific version of the symbol
5738 within the shared library, you can use the aliases of convenience
5739 (i.e., @samp{old_foo}), or you can use the @samp{.symver} directive to
5740 specifically bind to an external version of the function in question.
5741
5742 You can also specify the language in the version script:
5743
5744 @smallexample
5745 VERSION extern "lang" @{ version-script-commands @}
5746 @end smallexample
5747
5748 The supported @samp{lang}s are @samp{C}, @samp{C++}, and @samp{Java}.
5749 The linker will iterate over the list of symbols at the link time and
5750 demangle them according to @samp{lang} before matching them to the
5751 patterns specified in @samp{version-script-commands}. The default
5752 @samp{lang} is @samp{C}.
5753
5754 Demangled names may contains spaces and other special characters. As
5755 described above, you can use a glob pattern to match demangled names,
5756 or you can use a double-quoted string to match the string exactly. In
5757 the latter case, be aware that minor differences (such as differing
5758 whitespace) between the version script and the demangler output will
5759 cause a mismatch. As the exact string generated by the demangler
5760 might change in the future, even if the mangled name does not, you
5761 should check that all of your version directives are behaving as you
5762 expect when you upgrade.
5763
5764 @node Expressions
5765 @section Expressions in Linker Scripts
5766 @cindex expressions
5767 @cindex arithmetic
5768 The syntax for expressions in the linker script language is identical to
5769 that of C expressions. All expressions are evaluated as integers. All
5770 expressions are evaluated in the same size, which is 32 bits if both the
5771 host and target are 32 bits, and is otherwise 64 bits.
5772
5773 You can use and set symbol values in expressions.
5774
5775 The linker defines several special purpose builtin functions for use in
5776 expressions.
5777
5778 @menu
5779 * Constants:: Constants
5780 * Symbolic Constants:: Symbolic constants
5781 * Symbols:: Symbol Names
5782 * Orphan Sections:: Orphan Sections
5783 * Location Counter:: The Location Counter
5784 * Operators:: Operators
5785 * Evaluation:: Evaluation
5786 * Expression Section:: The Section of an Expression
5787 * Builtin Functions:: Builtin Functions
5788 @end menu
5789
5790 @node Constants
5791 @subsection Constants
5792 @cindex integer notation
5793 @cindex constants in linker scripts
5794 All constants are integers.
5795
5796 As in C, the linker considers an integer beginning with @samp{0} to be
5797 octal, and an integer beginning with @samp{0x} or @samp{0X} to be
5798 hexadecimal. Alternatively the linker accepts suffixes of @samp{h} or
5799 @samp{H} for hexadecimal, @samp{o} or @samp{O} for octal, @samp{b} or
5800 @samp{B} for binary and @samp{d} or @samp{D} for decimal. Any integer
5801 value without a prefix or a suffix is considered to be decimal.
5802
5803 @cindex scaled integers
5804 @cindex K and M integer suffixes
5805 @cindex M and K integer suffixes
5806 @cindex suffixes for integers
5807 @cindex integer suffixes
5808 In addition, you can use the suffixes @code{K} and @code{M} to scale a
5809 constant by
5810 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5811 @ifnottex
5812 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5813 @code{1024} or @code{1024*1024}
5814 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5815 @end ifnottex
5816 @tex
5817 ${\rm 1024}$ or ${\rm 1024}^2$
5818 @end tex
5819 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5820 respectively. For example, the following
5821 all refer to the same quantity:
5822
5823 @smallexample
5824 _fourk_1 = 4K;
5825 _fourk_2 = 4096;
5826 _fourk_3 = 0x1000;
5827 _fourk_4 = 10000o;
5828 @end smallexample
5829
5830 Note - the @code{K} and @code{M} suffixes cannot be used in
5831 conjunction with the base suffixes mentioned above.
5832
5833 @node Symbolic Constants
5834 @subsection Symbolic Constants
5835 @cindex symbolic constants
5836 @kindex CONSTANT
5837 It is possible to refer to target specific constants via the use of
5838 the @code{CONSTANT(@var{name})} operator, where @var{name} is one of:
5839
5840 @table @code
5841 @item MAXPAGESIZE
5842 @kindex MAXPAGESIZE
5843 The target's maximum page size.
5844
5845 @item COMMONPAGESIZE
5846 @kindex COMMONPAGESIZE
5847 The target's default page size.
5848 @end table
5849
5850 So for example:
5851
5852 @smallexample
5853 .text ALIGN (CONSTANT (MAXPAGESIZE)) : @{ *(.text) @}
5854 @end smallexample
5855
5856 will create a text section aligned to the largest page boundary
5857 supported by the target.
5858
5859 @node Symbols
5860 @subsection Symbol Names
5861 @cindex symbol names
5862 @cindex names
5863 @cindex quoted symbol names
5864 @kindex "
5865 Unless quoted, symbol names start with a letter, underscore, or period
5866 and may include letters, digits, underscores, periods, and hyphens.
5867 Unquoted symbol names must not conflict with any keywords. You can
5868 specify a symbol which contains odd characters or has the same name as a
5869 keyword by surrounding the symbol name in double quotes:
5870 @smallexample
5871 "SECTION" = 9;
5872 "with a space" = "also with a space" + 10;
5873 @end smallexample
5874
5875 Since symbols can contain many non-alphabetic characters, it is safest
5876 to delimit symbols with spaces. For example, @samp{A-B} is one symbol,
5877 whereas @samp{A - B} is an expression involving subtraction.
5878
5879 @node Orphan Sections
5880 @subsection Orphan Sections
5881 @cindex orphan
5882 Orphan sections are sections present in the input files which
5883 are not explicitly placed into the output file by the linker
5884 script. The linker will still copy these sections into the
5885 output file by either finding, or creating a suitable output section
5886 in which to place the orphaned input section.
5887
5888 If the name of an orphaned input section exactly matches the name of
5889 an existing output section, then the orphaned input section will be
5890 placed at the end of that output section.
5891
5892 If there is no output section with a matching name then new output
5893 sections will be created. Each new output section will have the same
5894 name as the orphan section placed within it. If there are multiple
5895 orphan sections with the same name, these will all be combined into
5896 one new output section.
5897
5898 If new output sections are created to hold orphaned input sections,
5899 then the linker must decide where to place these new output sections
5900 in relation to existing output sections. On most modern targets, the
5901 linker attempts to place orphan sections after sections of the same
5902 attribute, such as code vs data, loadable vs non-loadable, etc. If no
5903 sections with matching attributes are found, or your target lacks this
5904 support, the orphan section is placed at the end of the file.
5905
5906 The command-line options @samp{--orphan-handling} and @samp{--unique}
5907 (@pxref{Options,,Command-line Options}) can be used to control which
5908 output sections an orphan is placed in.
5909
5910 @node Location Counter
5911 @subsection The Location Counter
5912 @kindex .
5913 @cindex dot
5914 @cindex location counter
5915 @cindex current output location
5916 The special linker variable @dfn{dot} @samp{.} always contains the
5917 current output location counter. Since the @code{.} always refers to a
5918 location in an output section, it may only appear in an expression
5919 within a @code{SECTIONS} command. The @code{.} symbol may appear
5920 anywhere that an ordinary symbol is allowed in an expression.
5921
5922 @cindex holes
5923 Assigning a value to @code{.} will cause the location counter to be
5924 moved. This may be used to create holes in the output section. The
5925 location counter may not be moved backwards inside an output section,
5926 and may not be moved backwards outside of an output section if so
5927 doing creates areas with overlapping LMAs.
5928
5929 @smallexample
5930 SECTIONS
5931 @{
5932 output :
5933 @{
5934 file1(.text)
5935 . = . + 1000;
5936 file2(.text)
5937 . += 1000;
5938 file3(.text)
5939 @} = 0x12345678;
5940 @}
5941 @end smallexample
5942 @noindent
5943 In the previous example, the @samp{.text} section from @file{file1} is
5944 located at the beginning of the output section @samp{output}. It is
5945 followed by a 1000 byte gap. Then the @samp{.text} section from
5946 @file{file2} appears, also with a 1000 byte gap following before the
5947 @samp{.text} section from @file{file3}. The notation @samp{= 0x12345678}
5948 specifies what data to write in the gaps (@pxref{Output Section Fill}).
5949
5950 @cindex dot inside sections
5951 Note: @code{.} actually refers to the byte offset from the start of the
5952 current containing object. Normally this is the @code{SECTIONS}
5953 statement, whose start address is 0, hence @code{.} can be used as an
5954 absolute address. If @code{.} is used inside a section description
5955 however, it refers to the byte offset from the start of that section,
5956 not an absolute address. Thus in a script like this:
5957
5958 @smallexample
5959 SECTIONS
5960 @{
5961 . = 0x100
5962 .text: @{
5963 *(.text)
5964 . = 0x200
5965 @}
5966 . = 0x500
5967 .data: @{
5968 *(.data)
5969 . += 0x600
5970 @}
5971 @}
5972 @end smallexample
5973
5974 The @samp{.text} section will be assigned a starting address of 0x100
5975 and a size of exactly 0x200 bytes, even if there is not enough data in
5976 the @samp{.text} input sections to fill this area. (If there is too
5977 much data, an error will be produced because this would be an attempt to
5978 move @code{.} backwards). The @samp{.data} section will start at 0x500
5979 and it will have an extra 0x600 bytes worth of space after the end of
5980 the values from the @samp{.data} input sections and before the end of
5981 the @samp{.data} output section itself.
5982
5983 @cindex dot outside sections
5984 Setting symbols to the value of the location counter outside of an
5985 output section statement can result in unexpected values if the linker
5986 needs to place orphan sections. For example, given the following:
5987
5988 @smallexample
5989 SECTIONS
5990 @{
5991 start_of_text = . ;
5992 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5993 end_of_text = . ;
5994
5995 start_of_data = . ;
5996 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5997 end_of_data = . ;
5998 @}
5999 @end smallexample
6000
6001 If the linker needs to place some input section, e.g. @code{.rodata},
6002 not mentioned in the script, it might choose to place that section
6003 between @code{.text} and @code{.data}. You might think the linker
6004 should place @code{.rodata} on the blank line in the above script, but
6005 blank lines are of no particular significance to the linker. As well,
6006 the linker doesn't associate the above symbol names with their
6007 sections. Instead, it assumes that all assignments or other
6008 statements belong to the previous output section, except for the
6009 special case of an assignment to @code{.}. I.e., the linker will
6010 place the orphan @code{.rodata} section as if the script was written
6011 as follows:
6012
6013 @smallexample
6014 SECTIONS
6015 @{
6016 start_of_text = . ;
6017 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
6018 end_of_text = . ;
6019
6020 start_of_data = . ;
6021 .rodata: @{ *(.rodata) @}
6022 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
6023 end_of_data = . ;
6024 @}
6025 @end smallexample
6026
6027 This may or may not be the script author's intention for the value of
6028 @code{start_of_data}. One way to influence the orphan section
6029 placement is to assign the location counter to itself, as the linker
6030 assumes that an assignment to @code{.} is setting the start address of
6031 a following output section and thus should be grouped with that
6032 section. So you could write:
6033
6034 @smallexample
6035 SECTIONS
6036 @{
6037 start_of_text = . ;
6038 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
6039 end_of_text = . ;
6040
6041 . = . ;
6042 start_of_data = . ;
6043 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
6044 end_of_data = . ;
6045 @}
6046 @end smallexample
6047
6048 Now, the orphan @code{.rodata} section will be placed between
6049 @code{end_of_text} and @code{start_of_data}.
6050
6051 @need 2000
6052 @node Operators
6053 @subsection Operators
6054 @cindex operators for arithmetic
6055 @cindex arithmetic operators
6056 @cindex precedence in expressions
6057 The linker recognizes the standard C set of arithmetic operators, with
6058 the standard bindings and precedence levels:
6059 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
6060 @ifnottex
6061 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
6062 @smallexample
6063 precedence associativity Operators Notes
6064 (highest)
6065 1 left ! - ~ (1)
6066 2 left * / %
6067 3 left + -
6068 4 left >> <<
6069 5 left == != > < <= >=
6070 6 left &
6071 7 left |
6072 8 left &&
6073 9 left ||
6074 10 right ? :
6075 11 right &= += -= *= /= (2)
6076 (lowest)
6077 @end smallexample
6078 Notes:
6079 (1) Prefix operators
6080 (2) @xref{Assignments}.
6081 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
6082 @end ifnottex
6083 @tex
6084 \vskip \baselineskip
6085 %"lispnarrowing" is the extra indent used generally for smallexample
6086 \hskip\lispnarrowing\vbox{\offinterlineskip
6087 \hrule
6088 \halign
6089 {\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ {\tt #}\ \hfil&\vrule#\cr
6090 height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
6091 &Precedence&& Associativity &&{\rm Operators}&\cr
6092 height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
6093 \noalign{\hrule}
6094 height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
6095 &highest&&&&&\cr
6096 % '176 is tilde, '~' in tt font
6097 &1&&left&&\qquad- \char'176\ !\qquad\dag&\cr
6098 &2&&left&&* / \%&\cr
6099 &3&&left&&+ -&\cr
6100 &4&&left&&>> <<&\cr
6101 &5&&left&&== != > < <= >=&\cr
6102 &6&&left&&\&&\cr
6103 &7&&left&&|&\cr
6104 &8&&left&&{\&\&}&\cr
6105 &9&&left&&||&\cr
6106 &10&&right&&? :&\cr
6107 &11&&right&&\qquad\&= += -= *= /=\qquad\ddag&\cr
6108 &lowest&&&&&\cr
6109 height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr}
6110 \hrule}
6111 @end tex
6112 @iftex
6113 {
6114 @obeylines@parskip=0pt@parindent=0pt
6115 @dag@quad Prefix operators.
6116 @ddag@quad @xref{Assignments}.
6117 }
6118 @end iftex
6119 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
6120
6121 @node Evaluation
6122 @subsection Evaluation
6123 @cindex lazy evaluation
6124 @cindex expression evaluation order
6125 The linker evaluates expressions lazily. It only computes the value of
6126 an expression when absolutely necessary.
6127
6128 The linker needs some information, such as the value of the start
6129 address of the first section, and the origins and lengths of memory
6130 regions, in order to do any linking at all. These values are computed
6131 as soon as possible when the linker reads in the linker script.
6132
6133 However, other values (such as symbol values) are not known or needed
6134 until after storage allocation. Such values are evaluated later, when
6135 other information (such as the sizes of output sections) is available
6136 for use in the symbol assignment expression.
6137
6138 The sizes of sections cannot be known until after allocation, so
6139 assignments dependent upon these are not performed until after
6140 allocation.
6141
6142 Some expressions, such as those depending upon the location counter
6143 @samp{.}, must be evaluated during section allocation.
6144
6145 If the result of an expression is required, but the value is not
6146 available, then an error results. For example, a script like the
6147 following
6148 @smallexample
6149 @group
6150 SECTIONS
6151 @{
6152 .text 9+this_isnt_constant :
6153 @{ *(.text) @}
6154 @}
6155 @end group
6156 @end smallexample
6157 @noindent
6158 will cause the error message @samp{non constant expression for initial
6159 address}.
6160
6161 @node Expression Section
6162 @subsection The Section of an Expression
6163 @cindex expression sections
6164 @cindex absolute expressions
6165 @cindex relative expressions
6166 @cindex absolute and relocatable symbols
6167 @cindex relocatable and absolute symbols
6168 @cindex symbols, relocatable and absolute
6169 Addresses and symbols may be section relative, or absolute. A section
6170 relative symbol is relocatable. If you request relocatable output
6171 using the @samp{-r} option, a further link operation may change the
6172 value of a section relative symbol. On the other hand, an absolute
6173 symbol will retain the same value throughout any further link
6174 operations.
6175
6176 Some terms in linker expressions are addresses. This is true of
6177 section relative symbols and for builtin functions that return an
6178 address, such as @code{ADDR}, @code{LOADADDR}, @code{ORIGIN} and
6179 @code{SEGMENT_START}. Other terms are simply numbers, or are builtin
6180 functions that return a non-address value, such as @code{LENGTH}.
6181 One complication is that unless you set @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")}
6182 (@pxref{Miscellaneous Commands}), numbers and absolute symbols are treated
6183 differently depending on their location, for compatibility with older
6184 versions of @code{ld}. Expressions appearing outside an output
6185 section definition treat all numbers as absolute addresses.
6186 Expressions appearing inside an output section definition treat
6187 absolute symbols as numbers. If @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")} is
6188 given, then absolute symbols and numbers are simply treated as numbers
6189 everywhere.
6190
6191 In the following simple example,
6192
6193 @smallexample
6194 @group
6195 SECTIONS
6196 @{
6197 . = 0x100;
6198 __executable_start = 0x100;
6199 .data :
6200 @{
6201 . = 0x10;
6202 __data_start = 0x10;
6203 *(.data)
6204 @}
6205 @dots{}
6206 @}
6207 @end group
6208 @end smallexample
6209
6210 both @code{.} and @code{__executable_start} are set to the absolute
6211 address 0x100 in the first two assignments, then both @code{.} and
6212 @code{__data_start} are set to 0x10 relative to the @code{.data}
6213 section in the second two assignments.
6214
6215 For expressions involving numbers, relative addresses and absolute
6216 addresses, ld follows these rules to evaluate terms:
6217
6218 @itemize @bullet
6219 @item
6220 Unary operations on an absolute address or number, and binary
6221 operations on two absolute addresses or two numbers, or between one
6222 absolute address and a number, apply the operator to the value(s).
6223 @item
6224 Unary operations on a relative address, and binary operations on two
6225 relative addresses in the same section or between one relative address
6226 and a number, apply the operator to the offset part of the address(es).
6227 @item
6228 Other binary operations, that is, between two relative addresses not
6229 in the same section, or between a relative address and an absolute
6230 address, first convert any non-absolute term to an absolute address
6231 before applying the operator.
6232 @end itemize
6233
6234 The result section of each sub-expression is as follows:
6235
6236 @itemize @bullet
6237 @item
6238 An operation involving only numbers results in a number.
6239 @item
6240 The result of comparisons, @samp{&&} and @samp{||} is also a number.
6241 @item
6242 The result of other binary arithmetic and logical operations on two
6243 relative addresses in the same section or two absolute addresses
6244 (after above conversions) is also a number when
6245 @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")} or inside an output section definition
6246 but an absolute address otherwise.
6247 @item
6248 The result of other operations on relative addresses or one
6249 relative address and a number, is a relative address in the same
6250 section as the relative operand(s).
6251 @item
6252 The result of other operations on absolute addresses (after above
6253 conversions) is an absolute address.
6254 @end itemize
6255
6256 You can use the builtin function @code{ABSOLUTE} to force an expression
6257 to be absolute when it would otherwise be relative. For example, to
6258 create an absolute symbol set to the address of the end of the output
6259 section @samp{.data}:
6260 @smallexample
6261 SECTIONS
6262 @{
6263 .data : @{ *(.data) _edata = ABSOLUTE(.); @}
6264 @}
6265 @end smallexample
6266 @noindent
6267 If @samp{ABSOLUTE} were not used, @samp{_edata} would be relative to the
6268 @samp{.data} section.
6269
6270 Using @code{LOADADDR} also forces an expression absolute, since this
6271 particular builtin function returns an absolute address.
6272
6273 @node Builtin Functions
6274 @subsection Builtin Functions
6275 @cindex functions in expressions
6276 The linker script language includes a number of builtin functions for
6277 use in linker script expressions.
6278
6279 @table @code
6280 @item ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
6281 @kindex ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
6282 @cindex expression, absolute
6283 Return the absolute (non-relocatable, as opposed to non-negative) value
6284 of the expression @var{exp}. Primarily useful to assign an absolute
6285 value to a symbol within a section definition, where symbol values are
6286 normally section relative. @xref{Expression Section}.
6287
6288 @item ADDR(@var{section})
6289 @kindex ADDR(@var{section})
6290 @cindex section address in expression
6291 Return the address (VMA) of the named @var{section}. Your
6292 script must previously have defined the location of that section. In
6293 the following example, @code{start_of_output_1}, @code{symbol_1} and
6294 @code{symbol_2} are assigned equivalent values, except that
6295 @code{symbol_1} will be relative to the @code{.output1} section while
6296 the other two will be absolute:
6297 @smallexample
6298 @group
6299 SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6300 .output1 :
6301 @{
6302 start_of_output_1 = ABSOLUTE(.);
6303 @dots{}
6304 @}
6305 .output :
6306 @{
6307 symbol_1 = ADDR(.output1);
6308 symbol_2 = start_of_output_1;
6309 @}
6310 @dots{} @}
6311 @end group
6312 @end smallexample
6313
6314 @item ALIGN(@var{align})
6315 @itemx ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
6316 @kindex ALIGN(@var{align})
6317 @kindex ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
6318 @cindex round up location counter
6319 @cindex align location counter
6320 @cindex round up expression
6321 @cindex align expression
6322 Return the location counter (@code{.}) or arbitrary expression aligned
6323 to the next @var{align} boundary. The single operand @code{ALIGN}
6324 doesn't change the value of the location counter---it just does
6325 arithmetic on it. The two operand @code{ALIGN} allows an arbitrary
6326 expression to be aligned upwards (@code{ALIGN(@var{align})} is
6327 equivalent to @code{ALIGN(ABSOLUTE(.), @var{align})}).
6328
6329 Here is an example which aligns the output @code{.data} section to the
6330 next @code{0x2000} byte boundary after the preceding section and sets a
6331 variable within the section to the next @code{0x8000} boundary after the
6332 input sections:
6333 @smallexample
6334 @group
6335 SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6336 .data ALIGN(0x2000): @{
6337 *(.data)
6338 variable = ALIGN(0x8000);
6339 @}
6340 @dots{} @}
6341 @end group
6342 @end smallexample
6343 @noindent
6344 The first use of @code{ALIGN} in this example specifies the location of
6345 a section because it is used as the optional @var{address} attribute of
6346 a section definition (@pxref{Output Section Address}). The second use
6347 of @code{ALIGN} is used to defines the value of a symbol.
6348
6349 The builtin function @code{NEXT} is closely related to @code{ALIGN}.
6350
6351 @item ALIGNOF(@var{section})
6352 @kindex ALIGNOF(@var{section})
6353 @cindex section alignment
6354 Return the alignment in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
6355 been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
6356 evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
6357 the alignment of the @code{.output} section is stored as the first
6358 value in that section.
6359 @smallexample
6360 @group
6361 SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
6362 .output @{
6363 LONG (ALIGNOF (.output))
6364 @dots{}
6365 @}
6366 @dots{} @}
6367 @end group
6368 @end smallexample
6369
6370 @item BLOCK(@var{exp})
6371 @kindex BLOCK(@var{exp})
6372 This is a synonym for @code{ALIGN}, for compatibility with older linker
6373 scripts. It is most often seen when setting the address of an output
6374 section.
6375
6376 @item DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
6377 @kindex DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
6378 This is equivalent to either
6379 @smallexample
6380 (ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - 1)))
6381 @end smallexample
6382 or
6383 @smallexample
6384 (ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize})
6385 + ((. + @var{commonpagesize} - 1) & (@var{maxpagesize} - @var{commonpagesize})))
6386 @end smallexample
6387 @noindent
6388 depending on whether the latter uses fewer @var{commonpagesize} sized pages
6389 for the data segment (area between the result of this expression and
6390 @code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}) than the former or not.
6391 If the latter form is used, it means @var{commonpagesize} bytes of runtime
6392 memory will be saved at the expense of up to @var{commonpagesize} wasted
6393 bytes in the on-disk file.
6394
6395 This expression can only be used directly in @code{SECTIONS} commands, not in
6396 any output section descriptions and only once in the linker script.
6397 @var{commonpagesize} should be less or equal to @var{maxpagesize} and should
6398 be the system page size the object wants to be optimized for while still
6399 running on system page sizes up to @var{maxpagesize}. Note however
6400 that @samp{-z relro} protection will not be effective if the system
6401 page size is larger than @var{commonpagesize}.
6402
6403 @noindent
6404 Example:
6405 @smallexample
6406 . = DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(0x10000, 0x2000);
6407 @end smallexample
6408
6409 @item DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
6410 @kindex DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
6411 This defines the end of data segment for @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN}
6412 evaluation purposes.
6413
6414 @smallexample
6415 . = DATA_SEGMENT_END(.);
6416 @end smallexample
6417
6418 @item DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
6419 @kindex DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
6420 This defines the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment when
6421 @samp{-z relro} option is used.
6422 When @samp{-z relro} option is not present, @code{DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END}
6423 does nothing, otherwise @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} is padded so that
6424 @var{exp} + @var{offset} is aligned to the @var{commonpagesize}
6425 argument given to @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN}. If present in the linker
6426 script, it must be placed between @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} and
6427 @code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}. Evaluates to the second argument plus any
6428 padding needed at the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment due to
6429 section alignment.
6430
6431 @smallexample
6432 . = DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(24, .);
6433 @end smallexample
6434
6435 @item DEFINED(@var{symbol})
6436 @kindex DEFINED(@var{symbol})
6437 @cindex symbol defaults
6438 Return 1 if @var{symbol} is in the linker global symbol table and is
6439 defined before the statement using DEFINED in the script, otherwise
6440 return 0. You can use this function to provide
6441 default values for symbols. For example, the following script fragment
6442 shows how to set a global symbol @samp{begin} to the first location in
6443 the @samp{.text} section---but if a symbol called @samp{begin} already
6444 existed, its value is preserved:
6445
6446 @smallexample
6447 @group
6448 SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6449 .text : @{
6450 begin = DEFINED(begin) ? begin : . ;
6451 @dots{}
6452 @}
6453 @dots{}
6454 @}
6455 @end group
6456 @end smallexample
6457
6458 @item LENGTH(@var{memory})
6459 @kindex LENGTH(@var{memory})
6460 Return the length of the memory region named @var{memory}.
6461
6462 @item LOADADDR(@var{section})
6463 @kindex LOADADDR(@var{section})
6464 @cindex section load address in expression
6465 Return the absolute LMA of the named @var{section}. (@pxref{Output
6466 Section LMA}).
6467
6468 @item LOG2CEIL(@var{exp})
6469 @kindex LOG2CEIL(@var{exp})
6470 Return the binary logarithm of @var{exp} rounded towards infinity.
6471 @code{LOG2CEIL(0)} returns 0.
6472
6473 @kindex MAX
6474 @item MAX(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
6475 Returns the maximum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
6476
6477 @kindex MIN
6478 @item MIN(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
6479 Returns the minimum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
6480
6481 @item NEXT(@var{exp})
6482 @kindex NEXT(@var{exp})
6483 @cindex unallocated address, next
6484 Return the next unallocated address that is a multiple of @var{exp}.
6485 This function is closely related to @code{ALIGN(@var{exp})}; unless you
6486 use the @code{MEMORY} command to define discontinuous memory for the
6487 output file, the two functions are equivalent.
6488
6489 @item ORIGIN(@var{memory})
6490 @kindex ORIGIN(@var{memory})
6491 Return the origin of the memory region named @var{memory}.
6492
6493 @item SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
6494 @kindex SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
6495 Return the base address of the named @var{segment}. If an explicit
6496 value has already been given for this segment (with a command-line
6497 @samp{-T} option) then that value will be returned otherwise the value
6498 will be @var{default}. At present, the @samp{-T} command-line option
6499 can only be used to set the base address for the ``text'', ``data'', and
6500 ``bss'' sections, but you can use @code{SEGMENT_START} with any segment
6501 name.
6502
6503 @item SIZEOF(@var{section})
6504 @kindex SIZEOF(@var{section})
6505 @cindex section size
6506 Return the size in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
6507 been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
6508 evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
6509 @code{symbol_1} and @code{symbol_2} are assigned identical values:
6510 @smallexample
6511 @group
6512 SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
6513 .output @{
6514 .start = . ;
6515 @dots{}
6516 .end = . ;
6517 @}
6518 symbol_1 = .end - .start ;
6519 symbol_2 = SIZEOF(.output);
6520 @dots{} @}
6521 @end group
6522 @end smallexample
6523
6524 @item SIZEOF_HEADERS
6525 @itemx sizeof_headers
6526 @kindex SIZEOF_HEADERS
6527 @cindex header size
6528 Return the size in bytes of the output file's headers. This is
6529 information which appears at the start of the output file. You can use
6530 this number when setting the start address of the first section, if you
6531 choose, to facilitate paging.
6532
6533 @cindex not enough room for program headers
6534 @cindex program headers, not enough room
6535 When producing an ELF output file, if the linker script uses the
6536 @code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} builtin function, the linker must compute the
6537 number of program headers before it has determined all the section
6538 addresses and sizes. If the linker later discovers that it needs
6539 additional program headers, it will report an error @samp{not enough
6540 room for program headers}. To avoid this error, you must avoid using
6541 the @code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} function, or you must rework your linker
6542 script to avoid forcing the linker to use additional program headers, or
6543 you must define the program headers yourself using the @code{PHDRS}
6544 command (@pxref{PHDRS}).
6545 @end table
6546
6547 @node Implicit Linker Scripts
6548 @section Implicit Linker Scripts
6549 @cindex implicit linker scripts
6550 If you specify a linker input file which the linker can not recognize as
6551 an object file or an archive file, it will try to read the file as a
6552 linker script. If the file can not be parsed as a linker script, the
6553 linker will report an error.
6554
6555 An implicit linker script will not replace the default linker script.
6556
6557 Typically an implicit linker script would contain only symbol
6558 assignments, or the @code{INPUT}, @code{GROUP}, or @code{VERSION}
6559 commands.
6560
6561 Any input files read because of an implicit linker script will be read
6562 at the position in the command line where the implicit linker script was
6563 read. This can affect archive searching.
6564
6565 @ifset GENERIC
6566 @node Machine Dependent
6567 @chapter Machine Dependent Features
6568
6569 @cindex machine dependencies
6570 @command{ld} has additional features on some platforms; the following
6571 sections describe them. Machines where @command{ld} has no additional
6572 functionality are not listed.
6573
6574 @menu
6575 @ifset H8300
6576 * H8/300:: @command{ld} and the H8/300
6577 @end ifset
6578 @ifset M68HC11
6579 * M68HC11/68HC12:: @code{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6580 @end ifset
6581 @ifset ARM
6582 * ARM:: @command{ld} and the ARM family
6583 @end ifset
6584 @ifset HPPA
6585 * HPPA ELF32:: @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF
6586 @end ifset
6587 @ifset M68K
6588 * M68K:: @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
6589 @end ifset
6590 @ifset MIPS
6591 * MIPS:: @command{ld} and the MIPS family
6592 @end ifset
6593 @ifset MMIX
6594 * MMIX:: @command{ld} and MMIX
6595 @end ifset
6596 @ifset MSP430
6597 * MSP430:: @command{ld} and MSP430
6598 @end ifset
6599 @ifset NDS32
6600 * NDS32:: @command{ld} and NDS32
6601 @end ifset
6602 @ifset NIOSII
6603 * Nios II:: @command{ld} and the Altera Nios II
6604 @end ifset
6605 @ifset POWERPC
6606 * PowerPC ELF32:: @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
6607 @end ifset
6608 @ifset POWERPC64
6609 * PowerPC64 ELF64:: @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
6610 @end ifset
6611 @ifset S/390
6612 * S/390 ELF:: @command{ld} and S/390 ELF Support
6613 @end ifset
6614 @ifset SPU
6615 * SPU ELF:: @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
6616 @end ifset
6617 @ifset TICOFF
6618 * TI COFF:: @command{ld} and TI COFF
6619 @end ifset
6620 @ifset WIN32
6621 * WIN32:: @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
6622 @end ifset
6623 @ifset XTENSA
6624 * Xtensa:: @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors
6625 @end ifset
6626 @end menu
6627 @end ifset
6628
6629 @ifset H8300
6630 @ifclear GENERIC
6631 @raisesections
6632 @end ifclear
6633
6634 @node H8/300
6635 @section @command{ld} and the H8/300
6636
6637 @cindex H8/300 support
6638 For the H8/300, @command{ld} can perform these global optimizations when
6639 you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6640
6641 @table @emph
6642 @cindex relaxing on H8/300
6643 @item relaxing address modes
6644 @command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
6645 targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6646 program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6647 respectively.
6648
6649 @cindex synthesizing on H8/300
6650 @item synthesizing instructions
6651 @c FIXME: specifically mov.b, or any mov instructions really? -> mov.b only, at least on H8, H8H, H8S
6652 @command{ld} finds all @code{mov.b} instructions which use the
6653 sixteen-bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
6654 page of memory, and changes them to use the eight-bit address form.
6655 (That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:16} into
6656 @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in the
6657 top page of memory).
6658
6659 @command{ld} finds all @code{mov} instructions which use the register
6660 indirect with 32-bit displacement addressing mode, but use a small
6661 displacement inside 16-bit displacement range, and changes them to use
6662 the 16-bit displacement form. (That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b
6663 @code{@@}@var{d}:32,ERx} into @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{d}:16,ERx}
6664 whenever the displacement @var{d} is in the 16 bit signed integer
6665 range. Only implemented in ELF-format ld).
6666
6667 @item bit manipulation instructions
6668 @command{ld} finds all bit manipulation instructions like @code{band, bclr,
6669 biand, bild, bior, bist, bixor, bld, bnot, bor, bset, bst, btst, bxor}
6670 which use 32 bit and 16 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
6671 page of memory, and changes them to use the 8 bit address form.
6672 (That is: the linker turns @samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:32} into
6673 @samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
6674 the top page of memory).
6675
6676 @item system control instructions
6677 @command{ld} finds all @code{ldc.w, stc.w} instructions which use the
6678 32 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top page of memory, and
6679 changes them to use 16 bit address form.
6680 (That is: the linker turns @samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:32,ccr} into
6681 @samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:16,ccr} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
6682 the top page of memory).
6683 @end table
6684
6685 @ifclear GENERIC
6686 @lowersections
6687 @end ifclear
6688 @end ifset
6689
6690 @ifclear GENERIC
6691 @ifset Renesas
6692 @c This stuff is pointless to say unless you're especially concerned
6693 @c with Renesas chips; don't enable it for generic case, please.
6694 @node Renesas
6695 @chapter @command{ld} and Other Renesas Chips
6696
6697 @command{ld} also supports the Renesas (formerly Hitachi) H8/300H,
6698 H8/500, and SH chips. No special features, commands, or command-line
6699 options are required for these chips.
6700 @end ifset
6701 @end ifclear
6702
6703 @ifset ARM
6704 @ifclear GENERIC
6705 @raisesections
6706 @end ifclear
6707
6708 @ifset M68HC11
6709 @ifclear GENERIC
6710 @raisesections
6711 @end ifclear
6712
6713 @node M68HC11/68HC12
6714 @section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6715
6716 @cindex M68HC11 and 68HC12 support
6717
6718 @subsection Linker Relaxation
6719
6720 For the Motorola 68HC11, @command{ld} can perform these global
6721 optimizations when you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6722
6723 @table @emph
6724 @cindex relaxing on M68HC11
6725 @item relaxing address modes
6726 @command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
6727 targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6728 program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6729 respectively.
6730
6731 @command{ld} also looks at all 16-bit extended addressing modes and
6732 transforms them in a direct addressing mode when the address is in
6733 page 0 (between 0 and 0x0ff).
6734
6735 @item relaxing gcc instruction group
6736 When @command{gcc} is called with @option{-mrelax}, it can emit group
6737 of instructions that the linker can optimize to use a 68HC11 direct
6738 addressing mode. These instructions consists of @code{bclr} or
6739 @code{bset} instructions.
6740
6741 @end table
6742
6743 @subsection Trampoline Generation
6744
6745 @cindex trampoline generation on M68HC11
6746 @cindex trampoline generation on M68HC12
6747 For 68HC11 and 68HC12, @command{ld} can generate trampoline code to
6748 call a far function using a normal @code{jsr} instruction. The linker
6749 will also change the relocation to some far function to use the
6750 trampoline address instead of the function address. This is typically the
6751 case when a pointer to a function is taken. The pointer will in fact
6752 point to the function trampoline.
6753
6754 @ifclear GENERIC
6755 @lowersections
6756 @end ifclear
6757 @end ifset
6758
6759 @node ARM
6760 @section @command{ld} and the ARM family
6761
6762 @cindex ARM interworking support
6763 @kindex --support-old-code
6764 For the ARM, @command{ld} will generate code stubs to allow functions calls
6765 between ARM and Thumb code. These stubs only work with code that has
6766 been compiled and assembled with the @samp{-mthumb-interwork} command
6767 line option. If it is necessary to link with old ARM object files or
6768 libraries, which have not been compiled with the -mthumb-interwork
6769 option then the @samp{--support-old-code} command-line switch should be
6770 given to the linker. This will make it generate larger stub functions
6771 which will work with non-interworking aware ARM code. Note, however,
6772 the linker does not support generating stubs for function calls to
6773 non-interworking aware Thumb code.
6774
6775 @cindex thumb entry point
6776 @cindex entry point, thumb
6777 @kindex --thumb-entry=@var{entry}
6778 The @samp{--thumb-entry} switch is a duplicate of the generic
6779 @samp{--entry} switch, in that it sets the program's starting address.
6780 But it also sets the bottom bit of the address, so that it can be
6781 branched to using a BX instruction, and the program will start
6782 executing in Thumb mode straight away.
6783
6784 @cindex PE import table prefixing
6785 @kindex --use-nul-prefixed-import-tables
6786 The @samp{--use-nul-prefixed-import-tables} switch is specifying, that
6787 the import tables idata4 and idata5 have to be generated with a zero
6788 element prefix for import libraries. This is the old style to generate
6789 import tables. By default this option is turned off.
6790
6791 @cindex BE8
6792 @kindex --be8
6793 The @samp{--be8} switch instructs @command{ld} to generate BE8 format
6794 executables. This option is only valid when linking big-endian
6795 objects - ie ones which have been assembled with the @option{-EB}
6796 option. The resulting image will contain big-endian data and
6797 little-endian code.
6798
6799 @cindex TARGET1
6800 @kindex --target1-rel
6801 @kindex --target1-abs
6802 The @samp{R_ARM_TARGET1} relocation is typically used for entries in the
6803 @samp{.init_array} section. It is interpreted as either @samp{R_ARM_REL32}
6804 or @samp{R_ARM_ABS32}, depending on the target. The @samp{--target1-rel}
6805 and @samp{--target1-abs} switches override the default.
6806
6807 @cindex TARGET2
6808 @kindex --target2=@var{type}
6809 The @samp{--target2=type} switch overrides the default definition of the
6810 @samp{R_ARM_TARGET2} relocation. Valid values for @samp{type}, their
6811 meanings, and target defaults are as follows:
6812 @table @samp
6813 @item rel
6814 @samp{R_ARM_REL32} (arm*-*-elf, arm*-*-eabi)
6815 @item abs
6816 @samp{R_ARM_ABS32} (arm*-*-symbianelf)
6817 @item got-rel
6818 @samp{R_ARM_GOT_PREL} (arm*-*-linux, arm*-*-*bsd)
6819 @end table
6820
6821 @cindex FIX_V4BX
6822 @kindex --fix-v4bx
6823 The @samp{R_ARM_V4BX} relocation (defined by the ARM AAELF
6824 specification) enables objects compiled for the ARMv4 architecture to be
6825 interworking-safe when linked with other objects compiled for ARMv4t, but
6826 also allows pure ARMv4 binaries to be built from the same ARMv4 objects.
6827
6828 In the latter case, the switch @option{--fix-v4bx} must be passed to the
6829 linker, which causes v4t @code{BX rM} instructions to be rewritten as
6830 @code{MOV PC,rM}, since v4 processors do not have a @code{BX} instruction.
6831
6832 In the former case, the switch should not be used, and @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6833 relocations are ignored.
6834
6835 @cindex FIX_V4BX_INTERWORKING
6836 @kindex --fix-v4bx-interworking
6837 Replace @code{BX rM} instructions identified by @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6838 relocations with a branch to the following veneer:
6839
6840 @smallexample
6841 TST rM, #1
6842 MOVEQ PC, rM
6843 BX Rn
6844 @end smallexample
6845
6846 This allows generation of libraries/applications that work on ARMv4 cores
6847 and are still interworking safe. Note that the above veneer clobbers the
6848 condition flags, so may cause incorrect program behavior in rare cases.
6849
6850 @cindex USE_BLX
6851 @kindex --use-blx
6852 The @samp{--use-blx} switch enables the linker to use ARM/Thumb
6853 BLX instructions (available on ARMv5t and above) in various
6854 situations. Currently it is used to perform calls via the PLT from Thumb
6855 code using BLX rather than using BX and a mode-switching stub before
6856 each PLT entry. This should lead to such calls executing slightly faster.
6857
6858 This option is enabled implicitly for SymbianOS, so there is no need to
6859 specify it if you are using that target.
6860
6861 @cindex VFP11_DENORM_FIX
6862 @kindex --vfp11-denorm-fix
6863 The @samp{--vfp11-denorm-fix} switch enables a link-time workaround for a
6864 bug in certain VFP11 coprocessor hardware, which sometimes allows
6865 instructions with denorm operands (which must be handled by support code)
6866 to have those operands overwritten by subsequent instructions before
6867 the support code can read the intended values.
6868
6869 The bug may be avoided in scalar mode if you allow at least one
6870 intervening instruction between a VFP11 instruction which uses a register
6871 and another instruction which writes to the same register, or at least two
6872 intervening instructions if vector mode is in use. The bug only affects
6873 full-compliance floating-point mode: you do not need this workaround if
6874 you are using "runfast" mode. Please contact ARM for further details.
6875
6876 If you know you are using buggy VFP11 hardware, you can
6877 enable this workaround by specifying the linker option
6878 @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=scalar} if you are using the VFP11 scalar
6879 mode only, or @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=vector} if you are using
6880 vector mode (the latter also works for scalar code). The default is
6881 @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=none}.
6882
6883 If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
6884 potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each
6885 such sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists of the
6886 first instruction of the sequence and a branch back to the subsequent
6887 instruction. The original instruction is then replaced with a branch to
6888 the veneer. The extra cycles required to call and return from the veneer
6889 are sufficient to avoid the erratum in both the scalar and vector cases.
6890
6891 @cindex ARM1176 erratum workaround
6892 @kindex --fix-arm1176
6893 @kindex --no-fix-arm1176
6894 The @samp{--fix-arm1176} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum
6895 in certain ARM1176 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you
6896 are targeting ARM v6 (excluding ARM v6T2) or earlier. It can be disabled
6897 unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-arm1176}.
6898
6899 Further information is available in the ``ARM1176JZ-S and ARM1176JZF-S
6900 Programmer Advice Notice'' available on the ARM documentation website at:
6901 http://infocenter.arm.com/.
6902
6903 @cindex STM32L4xx erratum workaround
6904 @kindex --fix-stm32l4xx-629360
6905
6906 The @samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360} switch enables a link-time
6907 workaround for a bug in the bus matrix / memory controller for some of
6908 the STM32 Cortex-M4 based products (STM32L4xx). When accessing
6909 off-chip memory via the affected bus for bus reads of 9 words or more,
6910 the bus can generate corrupt data and/or abort. These are only
6911 core-initiated accesses (not DMA), and might affect any access:
6912 integer loads such as LDM, POP and floating-point loads such as VLDM,
6913 VPOP. Stores are not affected.
6914
6915 The bug can be avoided by splitting memory accesses into the
6916 necessary chunks to keep bus reads below 8 words.
6917
6918 The workaround is not enabled by default, this is equivalent to use
6919 @samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360=none}. If you know you are using buggy
6920 STM32L4xx hardware, you can enable the workaround by specifying the
6921 linker option @samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360}, or the equivalent
6922 @samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360=default}.
6923
6924 If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
6925 potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each
6926 such sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists in a
6927 replacement sequence emulating the behaviour of the original one and a
6928 branch back to the subsequent instruction. The original instruction is
6929 then replaced with a branch to the veneer.
6930
6931 The workaround does not always preserve the memory access order for
6932 the LDMDB instruction, when the instruction loads the PC.
6933
6934 The workaround is not able to handle problematic instructions when
6935 they are in the middle of an IT block, since a branch is not allowed
6936 there. In that case, the linker reports a warning and no replacement
6937 occurs.
6938
6939 The workaround is not able to replace problematic instructions with a
6940 PC-relative branch instruction if the @samp{.text} section is too
6941 large. In that case, when the branch that replaces the original code
6942 cannot be encoded, the linker reports a warning and no replacement
6943 occurs.
6944
6945 @cindex NO_ENUM_SIZE_WARNING
6946 @kindex --no-enum-size-warning
6947 The @option{--no-enum-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
6948 warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
6949 enumeration size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
6950 linking of an object file using 32-bit enumeration values with another
6951 using enumeration values fitted into the smallest possible space will
6952 not be diagnosed.
6953
6954 @cindex NO_WCHAR_SIZE_WARNING
6955 @kindex --no-wchar-size-warning
6956 The @option{--no-wchar-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
6957 warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
6958 @code{wchar_t} size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
6959 linking of an object file using 32-bit @code{wchar_t} values with another
6960 using 16-bit @code{wchar_t} values will not be diagnosed.
6961
6962 @cindex PIC_VENEER
6963 @kindex --pic-veneer
6964 The @samp{--pic-veneer} switch makes the linker use PIC sequences for
6965 ARM/Thumb interworking veneers, even if the rest of the binary
6966 is not PIC. This avoids problems on uClinux targets where
6967 @samp{--emit-relocs} is used to generate relocatable binaries.
6968
6969 @cindex STUB_GROUP_SIZE
6970 @kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
6971 The linker will automatically generate and insert small sequences of
6972 code into a linked ARM ELF executable whenever an attempt is made to
6973 perform a function call to a symbol that is too far away. The
6974 placement of these sequences of instructions - called stubs - is
6975 controlled by the command-line option @option{--stub-group-size=N}.
6976 The placement is important because a poor choice can create a need for
6977 duplicate stubs, increasing the code size. The linker will try to
6978 group stubs together in order to reduce interruptions to the flow of
6979 code, but it needs guidance as to how big these groups should be and
6980 where they should be placed.
6981
6982 The value of @samp{N}, the parameter to the
6983 @option{--stub-group-size=} option controls where the stub groups are
6984 placed. If it is negative then all stubs are placed after the first
6985 branch that needs them. If it is positive then the stubs can be
6986 placed either before or after the branches that need them. If the
6987 value of @samp{N} is 1 (either +1 or -1) then the linker will choose
6988 exactly where to place groups of stubs, using its built in heuristics.
6989 A value of @samp{N} greater than 1 (or smaller than -1) tells the
6990 linker that a single group of stubs can service at most @samp{N} bytes
6991 from the input sections.
6992
6993 The default, if @option{--stub-group-size=} is not specified, is
6994 @samp{N = +1}.
6995
6996 Farcalls stubs insertion is fully supported for the ARM-EABI target
6997 only, because it relies on object files properties not present
6998 otherwise.
6999
7000 @cindex Cortex-A8 erratum workaround
7001 @kindex --fix-cortex-a8
7002 @kindex --no-fix-cortex-a8
7003 The @samp{--fix-cortex-a8} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum in certain Cortex-A8 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you are targeting the ARM v7-A architecture profile. It can be enabled otherwise by specifying @samp{--fix-cortex-a8}, or disabled unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-cortex-a8}.
7004
7005 The erratum only affects Thumb-2 code. Please contact ARM for further details.
7006
7007 @cindex Cortex-A53 erratum 835769 workaround
7008 @kindex --fix-cortex-a53-835769
7009 @kindex --no-fix-cortex-a53-835769
7010 The @samp{--fix-cortex-a53-835769} switch enables a link-time workaround for erratum 835769 present on certain early revisions of Cortex-A53 processors. The workaround is disabled by default. It can be enabled by specifying @samp{--fix-cortex-a53-835769}, or disabled unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-cortex-a53-835769}.
7011
7012 Please contact ARM for further details.
7013
7014 @kindex --merge-exidx-entries
7015 @kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
7016 @cindex Merging exidx entries
7017 The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent exidx entries in debuginfo.
7018
7019 @kindex --long-plt
7020 @cindex 32-bit PLT entries
7021 The @samp{--long-plt} option enables the use of 16 byte PLT entries
7022 which support up to 4Gb of code. The default is to use 12 byte PLT
7023 entries which only support 512Mb of code.
7024
7025 @kindex --no-apply-dynamic-relocs
7026 @cindex AArch64 rela addend
7027 The @samp{--no-apply-dynamic-relocs} option makes AArch64 linker do not apply
7028 link-time values for dynamic relocations.
7029
7030 @cindex Placement of SG veneers
7031 All SG veneers are placed in the special output section @code{.gnu.sgstubs}.
7032 Its start address must be set, either with the command-line option
7033 @samp{--section-start} or in a linker script, to indicate where to place these
7034 veneers in memory.
7035
7036 @kindex --cmse-implib
7037 @cindex Secure gateway import library
7038 The @samp{--cmse-implib} option requests that the import libraries
7039 specified by the @samp{--out-implib} and @samp{--in-implib} options are
7040 secure gateway import libraries, suitable for linking a non-secure
7041 executable against secure code as per ARMv8-M Security Extensions.
7042
7043 @kindex --in-implib=@var{file}
7044 @cindex Input import library
7045 The @samp{--in-implib=file} specifies an input import library whose symbols
7046 must keep the same address in the executable being produced. A warning is
7047 given if no @samp{--out-implib} is given but new symbols have been introduced
7048 in the executable that should be listed in its import library. Otherwise, if
7049 @samp{--out-implib} is specified, the symbols are added to the output import
7050 library. A warning is also given if some symbols present in the input import
7051 library have disappeared from the executable. This option is only effective
7052 for Secure Gateway import libraries, ie. when @samp{--cmse-implib} is
7053 specified.
7054
7055 @ifclear GENERIC
7056 @lowersections
7057 @end ifclear
7058 @end ifset
7059
7060 @ifset HPPA
7061 @ifclear GENERIC
7062 @raisesections
7063 @end ifclear
7064
7065 @node HPPA ELF32
7066 @section @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF Support
7067 @cindex HPPA multiple sub-space stubs
7068 @kindex --multi-subspace
7069 When generating a shared library, @command{ld} will by default generate
7070 import stubs suitable for use with a single sub-space application.
7071 The @samp{--multi-subspace} switch causes @command{ld} to generate export
7072 stubs, and different (larger) import stubs suitable for use with
7073 multiple sub-spaces.
7074
7075 @cindex HPPA stub grouping
7076 @kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
7077 Long branch stubs and import/export stubs are placed by @command{ld} in
7078 stub sections located between groups of input sections.
7079 @samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
7080 sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
7081 a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
7082 the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
7083 conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
7084 prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
7085 A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
7086 branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
7087 @samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
7088 @command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
7089 detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
7090 positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
7091
7092 Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
7093 single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
7094 create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
7095 large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
7096
7097 @ifclear GENERIC
7098 @lowersections
7099 @end ifclear
7100 @end ifset
7101
7102 @ifset M68K
7103 @ifclear GENERIC
7104 @raisesections
7105 @end ifclear
7106
7107 @node M68K
7108 @section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
7109
7110 @cindex Motorola 68K GOT generation
7111 @kindex --got=@var{type}
7112 The @samp{--got=@var{type}} option lets you choose the GOT generation scheme.
7113 The choices are @samp{single}, @samp{negative}, @samp{multigot} and
7114 @samp{target}. When @samp{target} is selected the linker chooses
7115 the default GOT generation scheme for the current target.
7116 @samp{single} tells the linker to generate a single GOT with
7117 entries only at non-negative offsets.
7118 @samp{negative} instructs the linker to generate a single GOT with
7119 entries at both negative and positive offsets. Not all environments
7120 support such GOTs.
7121 @samp{multigot} allows the linker to generate several GOTs in the
7122 output file. All GOT references from a single input object
7123 file access the same GOT, but references from different input object
7124 files might access different GOTs. Not all environments support such GOTs.
7125
7126 @ifclear GENERIC
7127 @lowersections
7128 @end ifclear
7129 @end ifset
7130
7131 @ifset MIPS
7132 @ifclear GENERIC
7133 @raisesections
7134 @end ifclear
7135
7136 @node MIPS
7137 @section @command{ld} and the MIPS family
7138
7139 @cindex MIPS microMIPS instruction choice selection
7140 @kindex --insn32
7141 @kindex --no-insn32
7142 The @samp{--insn32} and @samp{--no-insn32} options control the choice of
7143 microMIPS instructions used in code generated by the linker, such as that
7144 in the PLT or lazy binding stubs, or in relaxation. If @samp{--insn32} is
7145 used, then the linker only uses 32-bit instruction encodings. By default
7146 or if @samp{--no-insn32} is used, all instruction encodings are used,
7147 including 16-bit ones where possible.
7148
7149 @cindex MIPS branch relocation check control
7150 @kindex --ignore-branch-isa
7151 @kindex --no-ignore-branch-isa
7152 The @samp{--ignore-branch-isa} and @samp{--no-ignore-branch-isa} options
7153 control branch relocation checks for invalid ISA mode transitions. If
7154 @samp{--ignore-branch-isa} is used, then the linker accepts any branch
7155 relocations and any ISA mode transition required is lost in relocation
7156 calculation, except for some cases of @code{BAL} instructions which meet
7157 relaxation conditions and are converted to equivalent @code{JALX}
7158 instructions as the associated relocation is calculated. By default
7159 or if @samp{--no-ignore-branch-isa} is used a check is made causing
7160 the loss of an ISA mode transition to produce an error.
7161
7162 @ifclear GENERIC
7163 @lowersections
7164 @end ifclear
7165 @end ifset
7166
7167 @ifset MMIX
7168 @ifclear GENERIC
7169 @raisesections
7170 @end ifclear
7171
7172 @node MMIX
7173 @section @code{ld} and MMIX
7174 For MMIX, there is a choice of generating @code{ELF} object files or
7175 @code{mmo} object files when linking. The simulator @code{mmix}
7176 understands the @code{mmo} format. The binutils @code{objcopy} utility
7177 can translate between the two formats.
7178
7179 There is one special section, the @samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section.
7180 Contents in this section is assumed to correspond to that of global
7181 registers, and symbols referring to it are translated to special symbols,
7182 equal to registers. In a final link, the start address of the
7183 @samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section corresponds to the first allocated
7184 global register multiplied by 8. Register @code{$255} is not included in
7185 this section; it is always set to the program entry, which is at the
7186 symbol @code{Main} for @code{mmo} files.
7187
7188 Global symbols with the prefix @code{__.MMIX.start.}, for example
7189 @code{__.MMIX.start..text} and @code{__.MMIX.start..data} are special.
7190 The default linker script uses these to set the default start address
7191 of a section.
7192
7193 Initial and trailing multiples of zero-valued 32-bit words in a section,
7194 are left out from an mmo file.
7195
7196 @ifclear GENERIC
7197 @lowersections
7198 @end ifclear
7199 @end ifset
7200
7201 @ifset MSP430
7202 @ifclear GENERIC
7203 @raisesections
7204 @end ifclear
7205
7206 @node MSP430
7207 @section @code{ld} and MSP430
7208 For the MSP430 it is possible to select the MPU architecture. The flag @samp{-m [mpu type]}
7209 will select an appropriate linker script for selected MPU type. (To get a list of known MPUs
7210 just pass @samp{-m help} option to the linker).
7211
7212 @cindex MSP430 extra sections
7213 The linker will recognize some extra sections which are MSP430 specific:
7214
7215 @table @code
7216 @item @samp{.vectors}
7217 Defines a portion of ROM where interrupt vectors located.
7218
7219 @item @samp{.bootloader}
7220 Defines the bootloader portion of the ROM (if applicable). Any code
7221 in this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
7222
7223 @item @samp{.infomem}
7224 Defines an information memory section (if applicable). Any code in
7225 this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
7226
7227 @item @samp{.infomemnobits}
7228 This is the same as the @samp{.infomem} section except that any code
7229 in this section will not be uploaded to the MPU.
7230
7231 @item @samp{.noinit}
7232 Denotes a portion of RAM located above @samp{.bss} section.
7233
7234 The last two sections are used by gcc.
7235 @end table
7236
7237 @table @option
7238 @cindex MSP430 Options
7239 @kindex --code-region
7240 @item --code-region=[either,lower,upper,none]
7241 This will transform .text* sections to [either,lower,upper].text* sections. The
7242 argument passed to GCC for -mcode-region is propagated to the linker
7243 using this option.
7244
7245 @kindex --data-region
7246 @item --data-region=[either,lower,upper,none]
7247 This will transform .data*, .bss* and .rodata* sections to
7248 [either,lower,upper].[data,bss,rodata]* sections. The argument passed to GCC
7249 for -mdata-region is propagated to the linker using this option.
7250
7251 @kindex --disable-sec-transformation
7252 @item --disable-sec-transformation
7253 Prevent the transformation of sections as specified by the @code{--code-region}
7254 and @code{--data-region} options.
7255 This is useful if you are compiling and linking using a single call to the GCC
7256 wrapper, and want to compile the source files using -m[code,data]-region but
7257 not transform the sections for prebuilt libraries and objects.
7258 @end table
7259
7260 @ifclear GENERIC
7261 @lowersections
7262 @end ifclear
7263 @end ifset
7264
7265 @ifset NDS32
7266 @ifclear GENERIC
7267 @raisesections
7268 @end ifclear
7269
7270 @node NDS32
7271 @section @code{ld} and NDS32
7272 @kindex relaxing on NDS32
7273 For NDS32, there are some options to select relaxation behavior. The linker
7274 relaxes objects according to these options.
7275
7276 @table @code
7277 @item @samp{--m[no-]fp-as-gp}
7278 Disable/enable fp-as-gp relaxation.
7279
7280 @item @samp{--mexport-symbols=FILE}
7281 Exporting symbols and their address into FILE as linker script.
7282
7283 @item @samp{--m[no-]ex9}
7284 Disable/enable link-time EX9 relaxation.
7285
7286 @item @samp{--mexport-ex9=FILE}
7287 Export the EX9 table after linking.
7288
7289 @item @samp{--mimport-ex9=FILE}
7290 Import the Ex9 table for EX9 relaxation.
7291
7292 @item @samp{--mupdate-ex9}
7293 Update the existing EX9 table.
7294
7295 @item @samp{--mex9-limit=NUM}
7296 Maximum number of entries in the ex9 table.
7297
7298 @item @samp{--mex9-loop-aware}
7299 Avoid generating the EX9 instruction inside the loop.
7300
7301 @item @samp{--m[no-]ifc}
7302 Disable/enable the link-time IFC optimization.
7303
7304 @item @samp{--mifc-loop-aware}
7305 Avoid generating the IFC instruction inside the loop.
7306 @end table
7307
7308 @ifclear GENERIC
7309 @lowersections
7310 @end ifclear
7311 @end ifset
7312
7313 @ifset NIOSII
7314 @ifclear GENERIC
7315 @raisesections
7316 @end ifclear
7317
7318 @node Nios II
7319 @section @command{ld} and the Altera Nios II
7320 @cindex Nios II call relaxation
7321 @kindex --relax on Nios II
7322
7323 Call and immediate jump instructions on Nios II processors are limited to
7324 transferring control to addresses in the same 256MB memory segment,
7325 which may result in @command{ld} giving
7326 @samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
7327 The command-line option @option{--relax} enables the generation of
7328 trampolines that can access the entire 32-bit address space for calls
7329 outside the normal @code{call} and @code{jmpi} address range. These
7330 trampolines are inserted at section boundaries, so may not themselves
7331 be reachable if an input section and its associated call trampolines are
7332 larger than 256MB.
7333
7334 The @option{--relax} option is enabled by default unless @option{-r}
7335 is also specified. You can disable trampoline generation by using the
7336 @option{--no-relax} linker option. You can also disable this optimization
7337 locally by using the @samp{set .noat} directive in assembly-language
7338 source files, as the linker-inserted trampolines use the @code{at}
7339 register as a temporary.
7340
7341 Note that the linker @option{--relax} option is independent of assembler
7342 relaxation options, and that using the GNU assembler's @option{-relax-all}
7343 option interferes with the linker's more selective call instruction relaxation.
7344
7345 @ifclear GENERIC
7346 @lowersections
7347 @end ifclear
7348 @end ifset
7349
7350 @ifset POWERPC
7351 @ifclear GENERIC
7352 @raisesections
7353 @end ifclear
7354
7355 @node PowerPC ELF32
7356 @section @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
7357 @cindex PowerPC long branches
7358 @kindex --relax on PowerPC
7359 Branches on PowerPC processors are limited to a signed 26-bit
7360 displacement, which may result in @command{ld} giving
7361 @samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
7362 @samp{--relax} enables the generation of trampolines that can access
7363 the entire 32-bit address space. These trampolines are inserted at
7364 section boundaries, so may not themselves be reachable if an input
7365 section exceeds 33M in size. You may combine @samp{-r} and
7366 @samp{--relax} to add trampolines in a partial link. In that case
7367 both branches to undefined symbols and inter-section branches are also
7368 considered potentially out of range, and trampolines inserted.
7369
7370 @cindex PowerPC ELF32 options
7371 @table @option
7372 @cindex PowerPC PLT
7373 @kindex --bss-plt
7374 @item --bss-plt
7375 Current PowerPC GCC accepts a @samp{-msecure-plt} option that
7376 generates code capable of using a newer PLT and GOT layout that has
7377 the security advantage of no executable section ever needing to be
7378 writable and no writable section ever being executable. PowerPC
7379 @command{ld} will generate this layout, including stubs to access the
7380 PLT, if all input files (including startup and static libraries) were
7381 compiled with @samp{-msecure-plt}. @samp{--bss-plt} forces the old
7382 BSS PLT (and GOT layout) which can give slightly better performance.
7383
7384 @kindex --secure-plt
7385 @item --secure-plt
7386 @command{ld} will use the new PLT and GOT layout if it is linking new
7387 @samp{-fpic} or @samp{-fPIC} code, but does not do so automatically
7388 when linking non-PIC code. This option requests the new PLT and GOT
7389 layout. A warning will be given if some object file requires the old
7390 style BSS PLT.
7391
7392 @cindex PowerPC GOT
7393 @kindex --sdata-got
7394 @item --sdata-got
7395 The new secure PLT and GOT are placed differently relative to other
7396 sections compared to older BSS PLT and GOT placement. The location of
7397 @code{.plt} must change because the new secure PLT is an initialized
7398 section while the old PLT is uninitialized. The reason for the
7399 @code{.got} change is more subtle: The new placement allows
7400 @code{.got} to be read-only in applications linked with
7401 @samp{-z relro -z now}. However, this placement means that
7402 @code{.sdata} cannot always be used in shared libraries, because the
7403 PowerPC ABI accesses @code{.sdata} in shared libraries from the GOT
7404 pointer. @samp{--sdata-got} forces the old GOT placement. PowerPC
7405 GCC doesn't use @code{.sdata} in shared libraries, so this option is
7406 really only useful for other compilers that may do so.
7407
7408 @cindex PowerPC stub symbols
7409 @kindex --emit-stub-syms
7410 @item --emit-stub-syms
7411 This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
7412 symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7413
7414 @cindex PowerPC TLS optimization
7415 @kindex --no-tls-optimize
7416 @item --no-tls-optimize
7417 PowerPC @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
7418 sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
7419 disable the optimization.
7420 @end table
7421
7422 @ifclear GENERIC
7423 @lowersections
7424 @end ifclear
7425 @end ifset
7426
7427 @ifset POWERPC64
7428 @ifclear GENERIC
7429 @raisesections
7430 @end ifclear
7431
7432 @node PowerPC64 ELF64
7433 @section @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
7434
7435 @cindex PowerPC64 ELF64 options
7436 @table @option
7437 @cindex PowerPC64 stub grouping
7438 @kindex --stub-group-size
7439 @item --stub-group-size
7440 Long branch stubs, PLT call stubs and TOC adjusting stubs are placed
7441 by @command{ld} in stub sections located between groups of input sections.
7442 @samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
7443 sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
7444 a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
7445 the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
7446 conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
7447 prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
7448 A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
7449 branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
7450 @samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
7451 @command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
7452 detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
7453 positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
7454
7455 Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
7456 single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
7457 create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
7458 large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
7459
7460 @cindex PowerPC64 stub symbols
7461 @kindex --emit-stub-syms
7462 @item --emit-stub-syms
7463 This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
7464 symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7465
7466 @cindex PowerPC64 dot symbols
7467 @kindex --dotsyms
7468 @kindex --no-dotsyms
7469 @item --dotsyms
7470 @itemx --no-dotsyms
7471 These two options control how @command{ld} interprets version patterns
7472 in a version script. Older PowerPC64 compilers emitted both a
7473 function descriptor symbol with the same name as the function, and a
7474 code entry symbol with the name prefixed by a dot (@samp{.}). To
7475 properly version a function @samp{foo}, the version script thus needs
7476 to control both @samp{foo} and @samp{.foo}. The option
7477 @samp{--dotsyms}, on by default, automatically adds the required
7478 dot-prefixed patterns. Use @samp{--no-dotsyms} to disable this
7479 feature.
7480
7481 @cindex PowerPC64 register save/restore functions
7482 @kindex --save-restore-funcs
7483 @kindex --no-save-restore-funcs
7484 @item --save-restore-funcs
7485 @itemx --no-save-restore-funcs
7486 These two options control whether PowerPC64 @command{ld} automatically
7487 provides out-of-line register save and restore functions used by
7488 @samp{-Os} code. The default is to provide any such referenced
7489 function for a normal final link, and to not do so for a relocatable
7490 link.
7491
7492 @cindex PowerPC64 TLS optimization
7493 @kindex --no-tls-optimize
7494 @item --no-tls-optimize
7495 PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
7496 sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
7497 disable the optimization.
7498
7499 @cindex PowerPC64 __tls_get_addr optimization
7500 @kindex --tls-get-addr-optimize
7501 @kindex --no-tls-get-addr-optimize
7502 @item --tls-get-addr-optimize
7503 @itemx --no-tls-get-addr-optimize
7504 These options control whether PowerPC64 @command{ld} uses a special
7505 stub to call __tls_get_addr. PowerPC64 glibc 2.22 and later support
7506 an optimization that allows the second and subsequent calls to
7507 @code{__tls_get_addr} for a given symbol to be resolved by the special
7508 stub without calling in to glibc. By default the linker enables this
7509 option when glibc advertises the availability of __tls_get_addr_opt.
7510 Forcing this option on when using an older glibc won't do much besides
7511 slow down your applications, but may be useful if linking an
7512 application against an older glibc with the expectation that it will
7513 normally be used on systems having a newer glibc.
7514
7515 @cindex PowerPC64 OPD optimization
7516 @kindex --no-opd-optimize
7517 @item --no-opd-optimize
7518 PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes @code{.opd} section entries
7519 corresponding to deleted link-once functions, or functions removed by
7520 the action of @samp{--gc-sections} or linker script @code{/DISCARD/}.
7521 Use this option to disable @code{.opd} optimization.
7522
7523 @cindex PowerPC64 OPD spacing
7524 @kindex --non-overlapping-opd
7525 @item --non-overlapping-opd
7526 Some PowerPC64 compilers have an option to generate compressed
7527 @code{.opd} entries spaced 16 bytes apart, overlapping the third word,
7528 the static chain pointer (unused in C) with the first word of the next
7529 entry. This option expands such entries to the full 24 bytes.
7530
7531 @cindex PowerPC64 TOC optimization
7532 @kindex --no-toc-optimize
7533 @item --no-toc-optimize
7534 PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes unused @code{.toc} section
7535 entries. Such entries are detected by examining relocations that
7536 reference the TOC in code sections. A reloc in a deleted code section
7537 marks a TOC word as unneeded, while a reloc in a kept code section
7538 marks a TOC word as needed. Since the TOC may reference itself, TOC
7539 relocs are also examined. TOC words marked as both needed and
7540 unneeded will of course be kept. TOC words without any referencing
7541 reloc are assumed to be part of a multi-word entry, and are kept or
7542 discarded as per the nearest marked preceding word. This works
7543 reliably for compiler generated code, but may be incorrect if assembly
7544 code is used to insert TOC entries. Use this option to disable the
7545 optimization.
7546
7547 @cindex PowerPC64 multi-TOC
7548 @kindex --no-multi-toc
7549 @item --no-multi-toc
7550 If given any toc option besides @code{-mcmodel=medium} or
7551 @code{-mcmodel=large}, PowerPC64 GCC generates code for a TOC model
7552 where TOC
7553 entries are accessed with a 16-bit offset from r2. This limits the
7554 total TOC size to 64K. PowerPC64 @command{ld} extends this limit by
7555 grouping code sections such that each group uses less than 64K for its
7556 TOC entries, then inserts r2 adjusting stubs between inter-group
7557 calls. @command{ld} does not split apart input sections, so cannot
7558 help if a single input file has a @code{.toc} section that exceeds
7559 64K, most likely from linking multiple files with @command{ld -r}.
7560 Use this option to turn off this feature.
7561
7562 @cindex PowerPC64 TOC sorting
7563 @kindex --no-toc-sort
7564 @item --no-toc-sort
7565 By default, @command{ld} sorts TOC sections so that those whose file
7566 happens to have a section called @code{.init} or @code{.fini} are
7567 placed first, followed by TOC sections referenced by code generated
7568 with PowerPC64 gcc's @code{-mcmodel=small}, and lastly TOC sections
7569 referenced only by code generated with PowerPC64 gcc's
7570 @code{-mcmodel=medium} or @code{-mcmodel=large} options. Doing this
7571 results in better TOC grouping for multi-TOC. Use this option to turn
7572 off this feature.
7573
7574 @cindex PowerPC64 PLT stub alignment
7575 @kindex --plt-align
7576 @kindex --no-plt-align
7577 @item --plt-align
7578 @itemx --no-plt-align
7579 Use these options to control whether individual PLT call stubs are
7580 aligned to a 32-byte boundary, or to the specified power of two
7581 boundary when using @code{--plt-align=}. A negative value may be
7582 specified to pad PLT call stubs so that they do not cross the
7583 specified power of two boundary (or the minimum number of boundaries
7584 if a PLT stub is so large that it must cross a boundary). By default
7585 PLT call stubs are aligned to 32-byte boundaries.
7586
7587 @cindex PowerPC64 PLT call stub static chain
7588 @kindex --plt-static-chain
7589 @kindex --no-plt-static-chain
7590 @item --plt-static-chain
7591 @itemx --no-plt-static-chain
7592 Use these options to control whether PLT call stubs load the static
7593 chain pointer (r11). @code{ld} defaults to not loading the static
7594 chain since there is never any need to do so on a PLT call.
7595
7596 @cindex PowerPC64 PLT call stub thread safety
7597 @kindex --plt-thread-safe
7598 @kindex --no-plt-thread-safe
7599 @item --plt-thread-safe
7600 @itemx --no-plt-thread-safe
7601 With power7's weakly ordered memory model, it is possible when using
7602 lazy binding for ld.so to update a plt entry in one thread and have
7603 another thread see the individual plt entry words update in the wrong
7604 order, despite ld.so carefully writing in the correct order and using
7605 memory write barriers. To avoid this we need some sort of read
7606 barrier in the call stub, or use LD_BIND_NOW=1. By default, @code{ld}
7607 looks for calls to commonly used functions that create threads, and if
7608 seen, adds the necessary barriers. Use these options to change the
7609 default behaviour.
7610
7611 @cindex PowerPC64 ELFv2 PLT localentry optimization
7612 @kindex --plt-localentry
7613 @kindex --no-plt-localentry
7614 @item --plt-localentry
7615 @itemx --no-localentry
7616 ELFv2 functions with localentry:0 are those with a single entry point,
7617 ie. global entry == local entry, and that have no requirement on r2
7618 (the TOC/GOT pointer) or r12, and guarantee r2 is unchanged on return.
7619 Such an external function can be called via the PLT without saving r2
7620 or restoring it on return, avoiding a common load-hit-store for small
7621 functions. The optimization is attractive, with up to 40% reduction
7622 in execution time for a small function, but can result in symbol
7623 interposition failures. Also, minor changes in a shared library,
7624 including system libraries, can cause a function that was localentry:0
7625 to become localentry:8. This will result in a dynamic loader
7626 complaint and failure to run. The option is experimental, use with
7627 care. @option{--no-plt-localentry} is the default.
7628 @end table
7629
7630 @ifclear GENERIC
7631 @lowersections
7632 @end ifclear
7633 @end ifset
7634
7635 @ifset S/390
7636 @ifclear GENERIC
7637 @raisesections
7638 @end ifclear
7639
7640 @node S/390 ELF
7641 @section @command{ld} and S/390 ELF Support
7642
7643 @cindex S/390 ELF options
7644 @table @option
7645
7646 @cindex S/390
7647 @kindex --s390-pgste
7648 @item --s390-pgste
7649 This option marks the result file with a @code{PT_S390_PGSTE}
7650 segment. The Linux kernel is supposed to allocate 4k page tables for
7651 binaries marked that way.
7652 @end table
7653
7654 @ifclear GENERIC
7655 @lowersections
7656 @end ifclear
7657 @end ifset
7658
7659 @ifset SPU
7660 @ifclear GENERIC
7661 @raisesections
7662 @end ifclear
7663
7664 @node SPU ELF
7665 @section @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
7666
7667 @cindex SPU ELF options
7668 @table @option
7669
7670 @cindex SPU plugins
7671 @kindex --plugin
7672 @item --plugin
7673 This option marks an executable as a PIC plugin module.
7674
7675 @cindex SPU overlays
7676 @kindex --no-overlays
7677 @item --no-overlays
7678 Normally, @command{ld} recognizes calls to functions within overlay
7679 regions, and redirects such calls to an overlay manager via a stub.
7680 @command{ld} also provides a built-in overlay manager. This option
7681 turns off all this special overlay handling.
7682
7683 @cindex SPU overlay stub symbols
7684 @kindex --emit-stub-syms
7685 @item --emit-stub-syms
7686 This option causes @command{ld} to label overlay stubs with a local
7687 symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7688
7689 @cindex SPU extra overlay stubs
7690 @kindex --extra-overlay-stubs
7691 @item --extra-overlay-stubs
7692 This option causes @command{ld} to add overlay call stubs on all
7693 function calls out of overlay regions. Normally stubs are not added
7694 on calls to non-overlay regions.
7695
7696 @cindex SPU local store size
7697 @kindex --local-store=lo:hi
7698 @item --local-store=lo:hi
7699 @command{ld} usually checks that a final executable for SPU fits in
7700 the address range 0 to 256k. This option may be used to change the
7701 range. Disable the check entirely with @option{--local-store=0:0}.
7702
7703 @cindex SPU
7704 @kindex --stack-analysis
7705 @item --stack-analysis
7706 SPU local store space is limited. Over-allocation of stack space
7707 unnecessarily limits space available for code and data, while
7708 under-allocation results in runtime failures. If given this option,
7709 @command{ld} will provide an estimate of maximum stack usage.
7710 @command{ld} does this by examining symbols in code sections to
7711 determine the extents of functions, and looking at function prologues
7712 for stack adjusting instructions. A call-graph is created by looking
7713 for relocations on branch instructions. The graph is then searched
7714 for the maximum stack usage path. Note that this analysis does not
7715 find calls made via function pointers, and does not handle recursion
7716 and other cycles in the call graph. Stack usage may be
7717 under-estimated if your code makes such calls. Also, stack usage for
7718 dynamic allocation, e.g. alloca, will not be detected. If a link map
7719 is requested, detailed information about each function's stack usage
7720 and calls will be given.
7721
7722 @cindex SPU
7723 @kindex --emit-stack-syms
7724 @item --emit-stack-syms
7725 This option, if given along with @option{--stack-analysis} will result
7726 in @command{ld} emitting stack sizing symbols for each function.
7727 These take the form @code{__stack_<function_name>} for global
7728 functions, and @code{__stack_<number>_<function_name>} for static
7729 functions. @code{<number>} is the section id in hex. The value of
7730 such symbols is the stack requirement for the corresponding function.
7731 The symbol size will be zero, type @code{STT_NOTYPE}, binding
7732 @code{STB_LOCAL}, and section @code{SHN_ABS}.
7733 @end table
7734
7735 @ifclear GENERIC
7736 @lowersections
7737 @end ifclear
7738 @end ifset
7739
7740 @ifset TICOFF
7741 @ifclear GENERIC
7742 @raisesections
7743 @end ifclear
7744
7745 @node TI COFF
7746 @section @command{ld}'s Support for Various TI COFF Versions
7747 @cindex TI COFF versions
7748 @kindex --format=@var{version}
7749 The @samp{--format} switch allows selection of one of the various
7750 TI COFF versions. The latest of this writing is 2; versions 0 and 1 are
7751 also supported. The TI COFF versions also vary in header byte-order
7752 format; @command{ld} will read any version or byte order, but the output
7753 header format depends on the default specified by the specific target.
7754
7755 @ifclear GENERIC
7756 @lowersections
7757 @end ifclear
7758 @end ifset
7759
7760 @ifset WIN32
7761 @ifclear GENERIC
7762 @raisesections
7763 @end ifclear
7764
7765 @node WIN32
7766 @section @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
7767
7768 This section describes some of the win32 specific @command{ld} issues.
7769 See @ref{Options,,Command-line Options} for detailed description of the
7770 command-line options mentioned here.
7771
7772 @table @emph
7773 @cindex import libraries
7774 @item import libraries
7775 The standard Windows linker creates and uses so-called import
7776 libraries, which contains information for linking to dll's. They are
7777 regular static archives and are handled as any other static
7778 archive. The cygwin and mingw ports of @command{ld} have specific
7779 support for creating such libraries provided with the
7780 @samp{--out-implib} command-line option.
7781
7782 @item exporting DLL symbols
7783 @cindex exporting DLL symbols
7784 The cygwin/mingw @command{ld} has several ways to export symbols for dll's.
7785
7786 @table @emph
7787 @item using auto-export functionality
7788 @cindex using auto-export functionality
7789 By default @command{ld} exports symbols with the auto-export functionality,
7790 which is controlled by the following command-line options:
7791
7792 @itemize
7793 @item --export-all-symbols [This is the default]
7794 @item --exclude-symbols
7795 @item --exclude-libs
7796 @item --exclude-modules-for-implib
7797 @item --version-script
7798 @end itemize
7799
7800 When auto-export is in operation, @command{ld} will export all the non-local
7801 (global and common) symbols it finds in a DLL, with the exception of a few
7802 symbols known to belong to the system's runtime and libraries. As it will
7803 often not be desirable to export all of a DLL's symbols, which may include
7804 private functions that are not part of any public interface, the command-line
7805 options listed above may be used to filter symbols out from the list for
7806 exporting. The @samp{--output-def} option can be used in order to see the
7807 final list of exported symbols with all exclusions taken into effect.
7808
7809 If @samp{--export-all-symbols} is not given explicitly on the
7810 command line, then the default auto-export behavior will be @emph{disabled}
7811 if either of the following are true:
7812
7813 @itemize
7814 @item A DEF file is used.
7815 @item Any symbol in any object file was marked with the __declspec(dllexport) attribute.
7816 @end itemize
7817
7818 @item using a DEF file
7819 @cindex using a DEF file
7820 Another way of exporting symbols is using a DEF file. A DEF file is
7821 an ASCII file containing definitions of symbols which should be
7822 exported when a dll is created. Usually it is named @samp{<dll
7823 name>.def} and is added as any other object file to the linker's
7824 command line. The file's name must end in @samp{.def} or @samp{.DEF}.
7825
7826 @example
7827 gcc -o <output> <objectfiles> <dll name>.def
7828 @end example
7829
7830 Using a DEF file turns off the normal auto-export behavior, unless the
7831 @samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
7832
7833 Here is an example of a DEF file for a shared library called @samp{xyz.dll}:
7834
7835 @example
7836 LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x20000000
7837
7838 EXPORTS
7839 foo
7840 bar
7841 _bar = bar
7842 another_foo = abc.dll.afoo
7843 var1 DATA
7844 doo = foo == foo2
7845 eoo DATA == var1
7846 @end example
7847
7848 This example defines a DLL with a non-default base address and seven
7849 symbols in the export table. The third exported symbol @code{_bar} is an
7850 alias for the second. The fourth symbol, @code{another_foo} is resolved
7851 by "forwarding" to another module and treating it as an alias for
7852 @code{afoo} exported from the DLL @samp{abc.dll}. The final symbol
7853 @code{var1} is declared to be a data object. The @samp{doo} symbol in
7854 export library is an alias of @samp{foo}, which gets the string name
7855 in export table @samp{foo2}. The @samp{eoo} symbol is an data export
7856 symbol, which gets in export table the name @samp{var1}.
7857
7858 The optional @code{LIBRARY <name>} command indicates the @emph{internal}
7859 name of the output DLL. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix,
7860 the default library suffix, @samp{.DLL} is appended.
7861
7862 When the .DEF file is used to build an application, rather than a
7863 library, the @code{NAME <name>} command should be used instead of
7864 @code{LIBRARY}. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix, the default
7865 executable suffix, @samp{.EXE} is appended.
7866
7867 With either @code{LIBRARY <name>} or @code{NAME <name>} the optional
7868 specification @code{BASE = <number>} may be used to specify a
7869 non-default base address for the image.
7870
7871 If neither @code{LIBRARY <name>} nor @code{NAME <name>} is specified,
7872 or they specify an empty string, the internal name is the same as the
7873 filename specified on the command line.
7874
7875 The complete specification of an export symbol is:
7876
7877 @example
7878 EXPORTS
7879 ( ( ( <name1> [ = <name2> ] )
7880 | ( <name1> = <module-name> . <external-name>))
7881 [ @@ <integer> ] [NONAME] [DATA] [CONSTANT] [PRIVATE] [== <name3>] ) *
7882 @end example
7883
7884 Declares @samp{<name1>} as an exported symbol from the DLL, or declares
7885 @samp{<name1>} as an exported alias for @samp{<name2>}; or declares
7886 @samp{<name1>} as a "forward" alias for the symbol
7887 @samp{<external-name>} in the DLL @samp{<module-name>}.
7888 Optionally, the symbol may be exported by the specified ordinal
7889 @samp{<integer>} alias. The optional @samp{<name3>} is the to be used
7890 string in import/export table for the symbol.
7891
7892 The optional keywords that follow the declaration indicate:
7893
7894 @code{NONAME}: Do not put the symbol name in the DLL's export table. It
7895 will still be exported by its ordinal alias (either the value specified
7896 by the .def specification or, otherwise, the value assigned by the
7897 linker). The symbol name, however, does remain visible in the import
7898 library (if any), unless @code{PRIVATE} is also specified.
7899
7900 @code{DATA}: The symbol is a variable or object, rather than a function.
7901 The import lib will export only an indirect reference to @code{foo} as
7902 the symbol @code{_imp__foo} (ie, @code{foo} must be resolved as
7903 @code{*_imp__foo}).
7904
7905 @code{CONSTANT}: Like @code{DATA}, but put the undecorated @code{foo} as
7906 well as @code{_imp__foo} into the import library. Both refer to the
7907 read-only import address table's pointer to the variable, not to the
7908 variable itself. This can be dangerous. If the user code fails to add
7909 the @code{dllimport} attribute and also fails to explicitly add the
7910 extra indirection that the use of the attribute enforces, the
7911 application will behave unexpectedly.
7912
7913 @code{PRIVATE}: Put the symbol in the DLL's export table, but do not put
7914 it into the static import library used to resolve imports at link time. The
7915 symbol can still be imported using the @code{LoadLibrary/GetProcAddress}
7916 API at runtime or by using the GNU ld extension of linking directly to
7917 the DLL without an import library.
7918
7919 See ld/deffilep.y in the binutils sources for the full specification of
7920 other DEF file statements
7921
7922 @cindex creating a DEF file
7923 While linking a shared dll, @command{ld} is able to create a DEF file
7924 with the @samp{--output-def <file>} command-line option.
7925
7926 @item Using decorations
7927 @cindex Using decorations
7928 Another way of marking symbols for export is to modify the source code
7929 itself, so that when building the DLL each symbol to be exported is
7930 declared as:
7931
7932 @example
7933 __declspec(dllexport) int a_variable
7934 __declspec(dllexport) void a_function(int with_args)
7935 @end example
7936
7937 All such symbols will be exported from the DLL. If, however,
7938 any of the object files in the DLL contain symbols decorated in
7939 this way, then the normal auto-export behavior is disabled, unless
7940 the @samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
7941
7942 Note that object files that wish to access these symbols must @emph{not}
7943 decorate them with dllexport. Instead, they should use dllimport,
7944 instead:
7945
7946 @example
7947 __declspec(dllimport) int a_variable
7948 __declspec(dllimport) void a_function(int with_args)
7949 @end example
7950
7951 This complicates the structure of library header files, because
7952 when included by the library itself the header must declare the
7953 variables and functions as dllexport, but when included by client
7954 code the header must declare them as dllimport. There are a number
7955 of idioms that are typically used to do this; often client code can
7956 omit the __declspec() declaration completely. See
7957 @samp{--enable-auto-import} and @samp{automatic data imports} for more
7958 information.
7959 @end table
7960
7961 @cindex automatic data imports
7962 @item automatic data imports
7963 The standard Windows dll format supports data imports from dlls only
7964 by adding special decorations (dllimport/dllexport), which let the
7965 compiler produce specific assembler instructions to deal with this
7966 issue. This increases the effort necessary to port existing Un*x
7967 code to these platforms, especially for large
7968 c++ libraries and applications. The auto-import feature, which was
7969 initially provided by Paul Sokolovsky, allows one to omit the
7970 decorations to achieve a behavior that conforms to that on POSIX/Un*x
7971 platforms. This feature is enabled with the @samp{--enable-auto-import}
7972 command-line option, although it is enabled by default on cygwin/mingw.
7973 The @samp{--enable-auto-import} option itself now serves mainly to
7974 suppress any warnings that are ordinarily emitted when linked objects
7975 trigger the feature's use.
7976
7977 auto-import of variables does not always work flawlessly without
7978 additional assistance. Sometimes, you will see this message
7979
7980 "variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
7981 documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
7982
7983 The @samp{--enable-auto-import} documentation explains why this error
7984 occurs, and several methods that can be used to overcome this difficulty.
7985 One of these methods is the @emph{runtime pseudo-relocs} feature, described
7986 below.
7987
7988 @cindex runtime pseudo-relocation
7989 For complex variables imported from DLLs (such as structs or classes),
7990 object files typically contain a base address for the variable and an
7991 offset (@emph{addend}) within the variable--to specify a particular
7992 field or public member, for instance. Unfortunately, the runtime loader used
7993 in win32 environments is incapable of fixing these references at runtime
7994 without the additional information supplied by dllimport/dllexport decorations.
7995 The standard auto-import feature described above is unable to resolve these
7996 references.
7997
7998 The @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} switch allows these references to
7999 be resolved without error, while leaving the task of adjusting the references
8000 themselves (with their non-zero addends) to specialized code provided by the
8001 runtime environment. Recent versions of the cygwin and mingw environments and
8002 compilers provide this runtime support; older versions do not. However, the
8003 support is only necessary on the developer's platform; the compiled result will
8004 run without error on an older system.
8005
8006 @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is not the default; it must be explicitly
8007 enabled as needed.
8008
8009 @cindex direct linking to a dll
8010 @item direct linking to a dll
8011 The cygwin/mingw ports of @command{ld} support the direct linking,
8012 including data symbols, to a dll without the usage of any import
8013 libraries. This is much faster and uses much less memory than does the
8014 traditional import library method, especially when linking large
8015 libraries or applications. When @command{ld} creates an import lib, each
8016 function or variable exported from the dll is stored in its own bfd, even
8017 though a single bfd could contain many exports. The overhead involved in
8018 storing, loading, and processing so many bfd's is quite large, and explains the
8019 tremendous time, memory, and storage needed to link against particularly
8020 large or complex libraries when using import libs.
8021
8022 Linking directly to a dll uses no extra command-line switches other than
8023 @samp{-L} and @samp{-l}, because @command{ld} already searches for a number
8024 of names to match each library. All that is needed from the developer's
8025 perspective is an understanding of this search, in order to force ld to
8026 select the dll instead of an import library.
8027
8028
8029 For instance, when ld is called with the argument @samp{-lxxx} it will attempt
8030 to find, in the first directory of its search path,
8031
8032 @example
8033 libxxx.dll.a
8034 xxx.dll.a
8035 libxxx.a
8036 xxx.lib
8037 libxxx.lib
8038 cygxxx.dll (*)
8039 libxxx.dll
8040 xxx.dll
8041 @end example
8042
8043 before moving on to the next directory in the search path.
8044
8045 (*) Actually, this is not @samp{cygxxx.dll} but in fact is @samp{<prefix>xxx.dll},
8046 where @samp{<prefix>} is set by the @command{ld} option
8047 @samp{--dll-search-prefix=<prefix>}. In the case of cygwin, the standard gcc spec
8048 file includes @samp{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}, so in effect we actually search for
8049 @samp{cygxxx.dll}.
8050
8051 Other win32-based unix environments, such as mingw or pw32, may use other
8052 @samp{<prefix>}es, although at present only cygwin makes use of this feature. It
8053 was originally intended to help avoid name conflicts among dll's built for the
8054 various win32/un*x environments, so that (for example) two versions of a zlib dll
8055 could coexist on the same machine.
8056
8057 The generic cygwin/mingw path layout uses a @samp{bin} directory for
8058 applications and dll's and a @samp{lib} directory for the import
8059 libraries (using cygwin nomenclature):
8060
8061 @example
8062 bin/
8063 cygxxx.dll
8064 lib/
8065 libxxx.dll.a (in case of dll's)
8066 libxxx.a (in case of static archive)
8067 @end example
8068
8069 Linking directly to a dll without using the import library can be
8070 done two ways:
8071
8072 1. Use the dll directly by adding the @samp{bin} path to the link line
8073 @example
8074 gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../bin/ -lxxx
8075 @end example
8076
8077 However, as the dll's often have version numbers appended to their names
8078 (@samp{cygncurses-5.dll}) this will often fail, unless one specifies
8079 @samp{-L../bin -lncurses-5} to include the version. Import libs are generally
8080 not versioned, and do not have this difficulty.
8081
8082 2. Create a symbolic link from the dll to a file in the @samp{lib}
8083 directory according to the above mentioned search pattern. This
8084 should be used to avoid unwanted changes in the tools needed for
8085 making the app/dll.
8086
8087 @example
8088 ln -s bin/cygxxx.dll lib/[cyg|lib|]xxx.dll[.a]
8089 @end example
8090
8091 Then you can link without any make environment changes.
8092
8093 @example
8094 gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../lib/ -lxxx
8095 @end example
8096
8097 This technique also avoids the version number problems, because the following is
8098 perfectly legal
8099
8100 @example
8101 bin/
8102 cygxxx-5.dll
8103 lib/
8104 libxxx.dll.a -> ../bin/cygxxx-5.dll
8105 @end example
8106
8107 Linking directly to a dll without using an import lib will work
8108 even when auto-import features are exercised, and even when
8109 @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is used.
8110
8111 Given the improvements in speed and memory usage, one might justifiably
8112 wonder why import libraries are used at all. There are three reasons:
8113
8114 1. Until recently, the link-directly-to-dll functionality did @emph{not}
8115 work with auto-imported data.
8116
8117 2. Sometimes it is necessary to include pure static objects within the
8118 import library (which otherwise contains only bfd's for indirection
8119 symbols that point to the exports of a dll). Again, the import lib
8120 for the cygwin kernel makes use of this ability, and it is not
8121 possible to do this without an import lib.
8122
8123 3. Symbol aliases can only be resolved using an import lib. This is
8124 critical when linking against OS-supplied dll's (eg, the win32 API)
8125 in which symbols are usually exported as undecorated aliases of their
8126 stdcall-decorated assembly names.
8127
8128 So, import libs are not going away. But the ability to replace
8129 true import libs with a simple symbolic link to (or a copy of)
8130 a dll, in many cases, is a useful addition to the suite of tools
8131 binutils makes available to the win32 developer. Given the
8132 massive improvements in memory requirements during linking, storage
8133 requirements, and linking speed, we expect that many developers
8134 will soon begin to use this feature whenever possible.
8135
8136 @item symbol aliasing
8137 @table @emph
8138 @item adding additional names
8139 Sometimes, it is useful to export symbols with additional names.
8140 A symbol @samp{foo} will be exported as @samp{foo}, but it can also be
8141 exported as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the DEF file
8142 when creating the dll. This will affect also the optional created
8143 import library. Consider the following DEF file:
8144
8145 @example
8146 LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
8147
8148 EXPORTS
8149 foo
8150 _foo = foo
8151 @end example
8152
8153 The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the symbol @samp{foo} to @samp{_foo}.
8154
8155 Another method for creating a symbol alias is to create it in the
8156 source code using the "weak" attribute:
8157
8158 @example
8159 void foo () @{ /* Do something. */; @}
8160 void _foo () __attribute__ ((weak, alias ("foo")));
8161 @end example
8162
8163 See the gcc manual for more information about attributes and weak
8164 symbols.
8165
8166 @item renaming symbols
8167 Sometimes it is useful to rename exports. For instance, the cygwin
8168 kernel does this regularly. A symbol @samp{_foo} can be exported as
8169 @samp{foo} but not as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the
8170 DEF file. (This will also affect the import library, if it is
8171 created). In the following example:
8172
8173 @example
8174 LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
8175
8176 EXPORTS
8177 _foo = foo
8178 @end example
8179
8180 The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the exported symbol @samp{foo} to
8181 @samp{_foo}.
8182 @end table
8183
8184 Note: using a DEF file disables the default auto-export behavior,
8185 unless the @samp{--export-all-symbols} command-line option is used.
8186 If, however, you are trying to rename symbols, then you should list
8187 @emph{all} desired exports in the DEF file, including the symbols
8188 that are not being renamed, and do @emph{not} use the
8189 @samp{--export-all-symbols} option. If you list only the
8190 renamed symbols in the DEF file, and use @samp{--export-all-symbols}
8191 to handle the other symbols, then the both the new names @emph{and}
8192 the original names for the renamed symbols will be exported.
8193 In effect, you'd be aliasing those symbols, not renaming them,
8194 which is probably not what you wanted.
8195
8196 @cindex weak externals
8197 @item weak externals
8198 The Windows object format, PE, specifies a form of weak symbols called
8199 weak externals. When a weak symbol is linked and the symbol is not
8200 defined, the weak symbol becomes an alias for some other symbol. There
8201 are three variants of weak externals:
8202 @itemize
8203 @item Definition is searched for in objects and libraries, historically
8204 called lazy externals.
8205 @item Definition is searched for only in other objects, not in libraries.
8206 This form is not presently implemented.
8207 @item No search; the symbol is an alias. This form is not presently
8208 implemented.
8209 @end itemize
8210 As a GNU extension, weak symbols that do not specify an alternate symbol
8211 are supported. If the symbol is undefined when linking, the symbol
8212 uses a default value.
8213
8214 @cindex aligned common symbols
8215 @item aligned common symbols
8216 As a GNU extension to the PE file format, it is possible to specify the
8217 desired alignment for a common symbol. This information is conveyed from
8218 the assembler or compiler to the linker by means of GNU-specific commands
8219 carried in the object file's @samp{.drectve} section, which are recognized
8220 by @command{ld} and respected when laying out the common symbols. Native
8221 tools will be able to process object files employing this GNU extension,
8222 but will fail to respect the alignment instructions, and may issue noisy
8223 warnings about unknown linker directives.
8224
8225 @end table
8226
8227 @ifclear GENERIC
8228 @lowersections
8229 @end ifclear
8230 @end ifset
8231
8232 @ifset XTENSA
8233 @ifclear GENERIC
8234 @raisesections
8235 @end ifclear
8236
8237 @node Xtensa
8238 @section @code{ld} and Xtensa Processors
8239
8240 @cindex Xtensa processors
8241 The default @command{ld} behavior for Xtensa processors is to interpret
8242 @code{SECTIONS} commands so that lists of explicitly named sections in a
8243 specification with a wildcard file will be interleaved when necessary to
8244 keep literal pools within the range of PC-relative load offsets. For
8245 example, with the command:
8246
8247 @smallexample
8248 SECTIONS
8249 @{
8250 .text : @{
8251 *(.literal .text)
8252 @}
8253 @}
8254 @end smallexample
8255
8256 @noindent
8257 @command{ld} may interleave some of the @code{.literal}
8258 and @code{.text} sections from different object files to ensure that the
8259 literal pools are within the range of PC-relative load offsets. A valid
8260 interleaving might place the @code{.literal} sections from an initial
8261 group of files followed by the @code{.text} sections of that group of
8262 files. Then, the @code{.literal} sections from the rest of the files
8263 and the @code{.text} sections from the rest of the files would follow.
8264
8265 @cindex @option{--relax} on Xtensa
8266 @cindex relaxing on Xtensa
8267 Relaxation is enabled by default for the Xtensa version of @command{ld} and
8268 provides two important link-time optimizations. The first optimization
8269 is to combine identical literal values to reduce code size. A redundant
8270 literal will be removed and all the @code{L32R} instructions that use it
8271 will be changed to reference an identical literal, as long as the
8272 location of the replacement literal is within the offset range of all
8273 the @code{L32R} instructions. The second optimization is to remove
8274 unnecessary overhead from assembler-generated ``longcall'' sequences of
8275 @code{L32R}/@code{CALLX@var{n}} when the target functions are within
8276 range of direct @code{CALL@var{n}} instructions.
8277
8278 For each of these cases where an indirect call sequence can be optimized
8279 to a direct call, the linker will change the @code{CALLX@var{n}}
8280 instruction to a @code{CALL@var{n}} instruction, remove the @code{L32R}
8281 instruction, and remove the literal referenced by the @code{L32R}
8282 instruction if it is not used for anything else. Removing the
8283 @code{L32R} instruction always reduces code size but can potentially
8284 hurt performance by changing the alignment of subsequent branch targets.
8285 By default, the linker will always preserve alignments, either by
8286 switching some instructions between 24-bit encodings and the equivalent
8287 density instructions or by inserting a no-op in place of the @code{L32R}
8288 instruction that was removed. If code size is more important than
8289 performance, the @option{--size-opt} option can be used to prevent the
8290 linker from widening density instructions or inserting no-ops, except in
8291 a few cases where no-ops are required for correctness.
8292
8293 The following Xtensa-specific command-line options can be used to
8294 control the linker:
8295
8296 @cindex Xtensa options
8297 @table @option
8298 @item --size-opt
8299 When optimizing indirect calls to direct calls, optimize for code size
8300 more than performance. With this option, the linker will not insert
8301 no-ops or widen density instructions to preserve branch target
8302 alignment. There may still be some cases where no-ops are required to
8303 preserve the correctness of the code.
8304 @end table
8305
8306 @ifclear GENERIC
8307 @lowersections
8308 @end ifclear
8309 @end ifset
8310
8311 @ifclear SingleFormat
8312 @node BFD
8313 @chapter BFD
8314
8315 @cindex back end
8316 @cindex object file management
8317 @cindex object formats available
8318 @kindex objdump -i
8319 The linker accesses object and archive files using the BFD libraries.
8320 These libraries allow the linker to use the same routines to operate on
8321 object files whatever the object file format. A different object file
8322 format can be supported simply by creating a new BFD back end and adding
8323 it to the library. To conserve runtime memory, however, the linker and
8324 associated tools are usually configured to support only a subset of the
8325 object file formats available. You can use @code{objdump -i}
8326 (@pxref{objdump,,objdump,binutils.info,The GNU Binary Utilities}) to
8327 list all the formats available for your configuration.
8328
8329 @cindex BFD requirements
8330 @cindex requirements for BFD
8331 As with most implementations, BFD is a compromise between
8332 several conflicting requirements. The major factor influencing
8333 BFD design was efficiency: any time used converting between
8334 formats is time which would not have been spent had BFD not
8335 been involved. This is partly offset by abstraction payback; since
8336 BFD simplifies applications and back ends, more time and care
8337 may be spent optimizing algorithms for a greater speed.
8338
8339 One minor artifact of the BFD solution which you should bear in
8340 mind is the potential for information loss. There are two places where
8341 useful information can be lost using the BFD mechanism: during
8342 conversion and during output. @xref{BFD information loss}.
8343
8344 @menu
8345 * BFD outline:: How it works: an outline of BFD
8346 @end menu
8347
8348 @node BFD outline
8349 @section How It Works: An Outline of BFD
8350 @cindex opening object files
8351 @include bfdsumm.texi
8352 @end ifclear
8353
8354 @node Reporting Bugs
8355 @chapter Reporting Bugs
8356 @cindex bugs in @command{ld}
8357 @cindex reporting bugs in @command{ld}
8358
8359 Your bug reports play an essential role in making @command{ld} reliable.
8360
8361 Reporting a bug may help you by bringing a solution to your problem, or
8362 it may not. But in any case the principal function of a bug report is
8363 to help the entire community by making the next version of @command{ld}
8364 work better. Bug reports are your contribution to the maintenance of
8365 @command{ld}.
8366
8367 In order for a bug report to serve its purpose, you must include the
8368 information that enables us to fix the bug.
8369
8370 @menu
8371 * Bug Criteria:: Have you found a bug?
8372 * Bug Reporting:: How to report bugs
8373 @end menu
8374
8375 @node Bug Criteria
8376 @section Have You Found a Bug?
8377 @cindex bug criteria
8378
8379 If you are not sure whether you have found a bug, here are some guidelines:
8380
8381 @itemize @bullet
8382 @cindex fatal signal
8383 @cindex linker crash
8384 @cindex crash of linker
8385 @item
8386 If the linker gets a fatal signal, for any input whatever, that is a
8387 @command{ld} bug. Reliable linkers never crash.
8388
8389 @cindex error on valid input
8390 @item
8391 If @command{ld} produces an error message for valid input, that is a bug.
8392
8393 @cindex invalid input
8394 @item
8395 If @command{ld} does not produce an error message for invalid input, that
8396 may be a bug. In the general case, the linker can not verify that
8397 object files are correct.
8398
8399 @item
8400 If you are an experienced user of linkers, your suggestions for
8401 improvement of @command{ld} are welcome in any case.
8402 @end itemize
8403
8404 @node Bug Reporting
8405 @section How to Report Bugs
8406 @cindex bug reports
8407 @cindex @command{ld} bugs, reporting
8408
8409 A number of companies and individuals offer support for @sc{gnu}
8410 products. If you obtained @command{ld} from a support organization, we
8411 recommend you contact that organization first.
8412
8413 You can find contact information for many support companies and
8414 individuals in the file @file{etc/SERVICE} in the @sc{gnu} Emacs
8415 distribution.
8416
8417 @ifset BUGURL
8418 Otherwise, send bug reports for @command{ld} to
8419 @value{BUGURL}.
8420 @end ifset
8421
8422 The fundamental principle of reporting bugs usefully is this:
8423 @strong{report all the facts}. If you are not sure whether to state a
8424 fact or leave it out, state it!
8425
8426 Often people omit facts because they think they know what causes the
8427 problem and assume that some details do not matter. Thus, you might
8428 assume that the name of a symbol you use in an example does not
8429 matter. Well, probably it does not, but one cannot be sure. Perhaps
8430 the bug is a stray memory reference which happens to fetch from the
8431 location where that name is stored in memory; perhaps, if the name
8432 were different, the contents of that location would fool the linker
8433 into doing the right thing despite the bug. Play it safe and give a
8434 specific, complete example. That is the easiest thing for you to do,
8435 and the most helpful.
8436
8437 Keep in mind that the purpose of a bug report is to enable us to fix
8438 the bug if it is new to us. Therefore, always write your bug reports
8439 on the assumption that the bug has not been reported previously.
8440
8441 Sometimes people give a few sketchy facts and ask, ``Does this ring a
8442 bell?'' This cannot help us fix a bug, so it is basically useless. We
8443 respond by asking for enough details to enable us to investigate.
8444 You might as well expedite matters by sending them to begin with.
8445
8446 To enable us to fix the bug, you should include all these things:
8447
8448 @itemize @bullet
8449 @item
8450 The version of @command{ld}. @command{ld} announces it if you start it with
8451 the @samp{--version} argument.
8452
8453 Without this, we will not know whether there is any point in looking for
8454 the bug in the current version of @command{ld}.
8455
8456 @item
8457 Any patches you may have applied to the @command{ld} source, including any
8458 patches made to the @code{BFD} library.
8459
8460 @item
8461 The type of machine you are using, and the operating system name and
8462 version number.
8463
8464 @item
8465 What compiler (and its version) was used to compile @command{ld}---e.g.
8466 ``@code{gcc-2.7}''.
8467
8468 @item
8469 The command arguments you gave the linker to link your example and
8470 observe the bug. To guarantee you will not omit something important,
8471 list them all. A copy of the Makefile (or the output from make) is
8472 sufficient.
8473
8474 If we were to try to guess the arguments, we would probably guess wrong
8475 and then we might not encounter the bug.
8476
8477 @item
8478 A complete input file, or set of input files, that will reproduce the
8479 bug. It is generally most helpful to send the actual object files
8480 provided that they are reasonably small. Say no more than 10K. For
8481 bigger files you can either make them available by FTP or HTTP or else
8482 state that you are willing to send the object file(s) to whomever
8483 requests them. (Note - your email will be going to a mailing list, so
8484 we do not want to clog it up with large attachments). But small
8485 attachments are best.
8486
8487 If the source files were assembled using @code{gas} or compiled using
8488 @code{gcc}, then it may be OK to send the source files rather than the
8489 object files. In this case, be sure to say exactly what version of
8490 @code{gas} or @code{gcc} was used to produce the object files. Also say
8491 how @code{gas} or @code{gcc} were configured.
8492
8493 @item
8494 A description of what behavior you observe that you believe is
8495 incorrect. For example, ``It gets a fatal signal.''
8496
8497 Of course, if the bug is that @command{ld} gets a fatal signal, then we
8498 will certainly notice it. But if the bug is incorrect output, we might
8499 not notice unless it is glaringly wrong. You might as well not give us
8500 a chance to make a mistake.
8501
8502 Even if the problem you experience is a fatal signal, you should still
8503 say so explicitly. Suppose something strange is going on, such as, your
8504 copy of @command{ld} is out of sync, or you have encountered a bug in the
8505 C library on your system. (This has happened!) Your copy might crash
8506 and ours would not. If you told us to expect a crash, then when ours
8507 fails to crash, we would know that the bug was not happening for us. If
8508 you had not told us to expect a crash, then we would not be able to draw
8509 any conclusion from our observations.
8510
8511 @item
8512 If you wish to suggest changes to the @command{ld} source, send us context
8513 diffs, as generated by @code{diff} with the @samp{-u}, @samp{-c}, or
8514 @samp{-p} option. Always send diffs from the old file to the new file.
8515 If you even discuss something in the @command{ld} source, refer to it by
8516 context, not by line number.
8517
8518 The line numbers in our development sources will not match those in your
8519 sources. Your line numbers would convey no useful information to us.
8520 @end itemize
8521
8522 Here are some things that are not necessary:
8523
8524 @itemize @bullet
8525 @item
8526 A description of the envelope of the bug.
8527
8528 Often people who encounter a bug spend a lot of time investigating
8529 which changes to the input file will make the bug go away and which
8530 changes will not affect it.
8531
8532 This is often time consuming and not very useful, because the way we
8533 will find the bug is by running a single example under the debugger
8534 with breakpoints, not by pure deduction from a series of examples.
8535 We recommend that you save your time for something else.
8536
8537 Of course, if you can find a simpler example to report @emph{instead}
8538 of the original one, that is a convenience for us. Errors in the
8539 output will be easier to spot, running under the debugger will take
8540 less time, and so on.
8541
8542 However, simplification is not vital; if you do not want to do this,
8543 report the bug anyway and send us the entire test case you used.
8544
8545 @item
8546 A patch for the bug.
8547
8548 A patch for the bug does help us if it is a good one. But do not omit
8549 the necessary information, such as the test case, on the assumption that
8550 a patch is all we need. We might see problems with your patch and decide
8551 to fix the problem another way, or we might not understand it at all.
8552
8553 Sometimes with a program as complicated as @command{ld} it is very hard to
8554 construct an example that will make the program follow a certain path
8555 through the code. If you do not send us the example, we will not be
8556 able to construct one, so we will not be able to verify that the bug is
8557 fixed.
8558
8559 And if we cannot understand what bug you are trying to fix, or why your
8560 patch should be an improvement, we will not install it. A test case will
8561 help us to understand.
8562
8563 @item
8564 A guess about what the bug is or what it depends on.
8565
8566 Such guesses are usually wrong. Even we cannot guess right about such
8567 things without first using the debugger to find the facts.
8568 @end itemize
8569
8570 @node MRI
8571 @appendix MRI Compatible Script Files
8572 @cindex MRI compatibility
8573 To aid users making the transition to @sc{gnu} @command{ld} from the MRI
8574 linker, @command{ld} can use MRI compatible linker scripts as an
8575 alternative to the more general-purpose linker scripting language
8576 described in @ref{Scripts}. MRI compatible linker scripts have a much
8577 simpler command set than the scripting language otherwise used with
8578 @command{ld}. @sc{gnu} @command{ld} supports the most commonly used MRI
8579 linker commands; these commands are described here.
8580
8581 In general, MRI scripts aren't of much use with the @code{a.out} object
8582 file format, since it only has three sections and MRI scripts lack some
8583 features to make use of them.
8584
8585 You can specify a file containing an MRI-compatible script using the
8586 @samp{-c} command-line option.
8587
8588 Each command in an MRI-compatible script occupies its own line; each
8589 command line starts with the keyword that identifies the command (though
8590 blank lines are also allowed for punctuation). If a line of an
8591 MRI-compatible script begins with an unrecognized keyword, @command{ld}
8592 issues a warning message, but continues processing the script.
8593
8594 Lines beginning with @samp{*} are comments.
8595
8596 You can write these commands using all upper-case letters, or all
8597 lower case; for example, @samp{chip} is the same as @samp{CHIP}.
8598 The following list shows only the upper-case form of each command.
8599
8600 @table @code
8601 @cindex @code{ABSOLUTE} (MRI)
8602 @item ABSOLUTE @var{secname}
8603 @itemx ABSOLUTE @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
8604 Normally, @command{ld} includes in the output file all sections from all
8605 the input files. However, in an MRI-compatible script, you can use the
8606 @code{ABSOLUTE} command to restrict the sections that will be present in
8607 your output program. If the @code{ABSOLUTE} command is used at all in a
8608 script, then only the sections named explicitly in @code{ABSOLUTE}
8609 commands will appear in the linker output. You can still use other
8610 input sections (whatever you select on the command line, or using
8611 @code{LOAD}) to resolve addresses in the output file.
8612
8613 @cindex @code{ALIAS} (MRI)
8614 @item ALIAS @var{out-secname}, @var{in-secname}
8615 Use this command to place the data from input section @var{in-secname}
8616 in a section called @var{out-secname} in the linker output file.
8617
8618 @var{in-secname} may be an integer.
8619
8620 @cindex @code{ALIGN} (MRI)
8621 @item ALIGN @var{secname} = @var{expression}
8622 Align the section called @var{secname} to @var{expression}. The
8623 @var{expression} should be a power of two.
8624
8625 @cindex @code{BASE} (MRI)
8626 @item BASE @var{expression}
8627 Use the value of @var{expression} as the lowest address (other than
8628 absolute addresses) in the output file.
8629
8630 @cindex @code{CHIP} (MRI)
8631 @item CHIP @var{expression}
8632 @itemx CHIP @var{expression}, @var{expression}
8633 This command does nothing; it is accepted only for compatibility.
8634
8635 @cindex @code{END} (MRI)
8636 @item END
8637 This command does nothing whatever; it's only accepted for compatibility.
8638
8639 @cindex @code{FORMAT} (MRI)
8640 @item FORMAT @var{output-format}
8641 Similar to the @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command in the more general linker
8642 language, but restricted to S-records, if @var{output-format} is @samp{S}
8643
8644 @cindex @code{LIST} (MRI)
8645 @item LIST @var{anything}@dots{}
8646 Print (to the standard output file) a link map, as produced by the
8647 @command{ld} command-line option @samp{-M}.
8648
8649 The keyword @code{LIST} may be followed by anything on the
8650 same line, with no change in its effect.
8651
8652 @cindex @code{LOAD} (MRI)
8653 @item LOAD @var{filename}
8654 @itemx LOAD @var{filename}, @var{filename}, @dots{} @var{filename}
8655 Include one or more object file @var{filename} in the link; this has the
8656 same effect as specifying @var{filename} directly on the @command{ld}
8657 command line.
8658
8659 @cindex @code{NAME} (MRI)
8660 @item NAME @var{output-name}
8661 @var{output-name} is the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; the
8662 MRI-compatible command @code{NAME} is equivalent to the command-line
8663 option @samp{-o} or the general script language command @code{OUTPUT}.
8664
8665 @cindex @code{ORDER} (MRI)
8666 @item ORDER @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
8667 @itemx ORDER @var{secname} @var{secname} @var{secname}
8668 Normally, @command{ld} orders the sections in its output file in the
8669 order in which they first appear in the input files. In an MRI-compatible
8670 script, you can override this ordering with the @code{ORDER} command. The
8671 sections you list with @code{ORDER} will appear first in your output
8672 file, in the order specified.
8673
8674 @cindex @code{PUBLIC} (MRI)
8675 @item PUBLIC @var{name}=@var{expression}
8676 @itemx PUBLIC @var{name},@var{expression}
8677 @itemx PUBLIC @var{name} @var{expression}
8678 Supply a value (@var{expression}) for external symbol
8679 @var{name} used in the linker input files.
8680
8681 @cindex @code{SECT} (MRI)
8682 @item SECT @var{secname}, @var{expression}
8683 @itemx SECT @var{secname}=@var{expression}
8684 @itemx SECT @var{secname} @var{expression}
8685 You can use any of these three forms of the @code{SECT} command to
8686 specify the start address (@var{expression}) for section @var{secname}.
8687 If you have more than one @code{SECT} statement for the same
8688 @var{secname}, only the @emph{first} sets the start address.
8689 @end table
8690
8691 @node GNU Free Documentation License
8692 @appendix GNU Free Documentation License
8693 @include fdl.texi
8694
8695 @node LD Index
8696 @unnumbered LD Index
8697
8698 @printindex cp
8699
8700 @tex
8701 % I think something like @@colophon should be in texinfo. In the
8702 % meantime:
8703 \long\def\colophon{\hbox to0pt{}\vfill
8704 \centerline{The body of this manual is set in}
8705 \centerline{\fontname\tenrm,}
8706 \centerline{with headings in {\bf\fontname\tenbf}}
8707 \centerline{and examples in {\tt\fontname\tentt}.}
8708 \centerline{{\it\fontname\tenit\/} and}
8709 \centerline{{\sl\fontname\tensl\/}}
8710 \centerline{are used for emphasis.}\vfill}
8711 \page\colophon
8712 % Blame: doc@@cygnus.com, 28mar91.
8713 @end tex
8714
8715 @bye